Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Catia Piping
Catia Piping
Version 5 Release 16
Page 1
Piping Design
User's Guide
Version 5 Release 16
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 2
Special Notices
CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systmes. Protected by one or more U.S. Patents number 5,615,321; 5,774,111; 5,821,941; 5,844,566; 6,233,351; 6,292,190; 6,360,357; 6,396,522; 6,459,441; 6,499,040; 6,545,680; 6,573,896; 6,597,382; 6,654,011; 6,654,027; 6,717,597; 6,745,100; 6,762,778; 6,828,974; 6,904,392 other patents pending. DELMIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systmes. ENOVIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systmes. SMARTEAM is a registered trademark of SmarTeam Corporation Ltd.
Any of the following terms may be used in this publication. These terms are trademarks of: Java OLE, VBScript for Windows, Visual Basic IMSpost Sun Microsystems Computer Company Microsoft Corporation Intelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc.
All other company names and product names mentioned are the property of their respective owners. Certain portions of this product contain elements subject to copyright owned by the following entities: Copyright Dassault Systemes Copyright Dassault Systemes of America Copyright D-Cubed Ltd., 1997-2000 Copyright ITI 1997-2000 Copyright Cenit 1997-2000 Copyright Mental Images Gmbh & Co KG, Berlin/Germany 1986-2000 Copyright Distrim2 Lda, 2000 Copyright Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique (INRIA Copyright Compaq Computer Corporation Copyright Boeing Company Copyright IONA Technologies PLC Copyright Intelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc., 2000 Copyright SmarTeam Corporation Ltd Copyright Xerox Engineering Systems Copyright Bitstream Inc. Copyright IBM Corp. Copyright Silicon Graphics Inc. Copyright Installshield Software Corp., 1990-2000 Copyright Microsoft Corporation Copyright Spatial Corp. Copyright LightWork Design Limited 1995-2000 Copyright Mainsoft Corp. Copyright NCCS 1997-2000 Copyright Weber-Moewius, D-Siegen Copyright Geometric Software Solutions Company Limited, 2001 Copyright Cogito Inc. Copyright Tech Soft America Copyright LMS International 2000, 2001
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 3
Raster Imaging Technology copyrighted by Snowbound Software Corporation 1993-2001 CAM-POST Version 2001/14.0 ICAM Technologies Corporation 1984-2001. All rights reserved The 2D/2.5D Display analysis function, the MSC.Nastran interface and the ANSYS interface are based on LMS International technologies and have been developed by LMS International ImpactXoft, IX Functional Modeling, IX Development, IX, IX Design, IXSPeeD, IX Speed Connector, IX Advanced Rendering, IX Interoperability Package, ImpactXoft Solver are trademarks of ImpactXoft. Copyright 20012002 ImpactXoft. All rights reserved. This software contains portions of Lattice Technology, Inc. software. Copyright 1997-2004 Lattice Technology, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copyright 2005, Dassault Systmes. All rights reserved.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 4
Piping Design
Preface Using This Guide What's New? Getting Started Entering the Workbench Set Correct Working Units and Grid Changing the Current Axis Creating a Run Placing a Part on a Run Updating Documents Saving Documents Using the Step Input Box and Construction Elements User Tasks Managing Piping Lines Creating a Line ID Renaming a Line ID Select/Filter Line IDs Deleting a Line ID Importing Line IDs Modify the Properties of a Line ID Querying a Line ID or its Members Transfer Members of a Line ID Merging Line IDs Routing Runs Routing a Run Routing with Defined Nodes Routing from the End of a Routable Branching a Run Routing a Run at a Slope Auto-route Between Equipment Route a Run Within a Pathway Routing from an Item Reservation Display Information About Routables Checking Turn Radius Errors Modifying Runs Using the Definition Dialog Box Changing a Section Changing the Angle of a Segment Moving Nodes
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 5
Align Adjacent Segments Make Segment Parallel to Reference Plane Make Segment Parallel to Compass Base Plane Make Segment Parallel to Z Axis Fit Segment for Parts Assembly Position Segment Relative to a Plane Create an Offset Connection Between Segments Create a Closed Loop Run Open a Closed Run Adjust Extremities of a Run Transfer Run to Another Document Connecting Elements Connecting Parts Disconnecting Parts Connections Between Work Packages Managing Publications Manipulating Objects Search for Objects in a Document Aligning Elements Distributing Elements Rotate Resource Using the Definition Dialog Box Snap Resources Together Quick Snap Resources Snap and Rotate a Resource Using Offset Planes and Advanced Offset Planes Generating Detail Information Disable/Enable Manipulation Handles Using Quick Translate to Move Objects Activating the Product or Parent Transfer Elements to New Document Moving In-Line Parts Rotating In-Line Parts Snapping Parts to a Run Defining the Rotation Axis in Free Space Query/modify properties of an object Edit or Display Properties of an Object Changing the Display Order of Properties Filter Shown Properties of an Object Renaming Objects Changing the Size or Spec of a Part Assigning Values to Parts Placing & Modifying a Piping Part Placing Parts Rotate a Piping Part Flipping a Part Inserting a Part Adding Insulation to a Part Placing Transitional Objects On a Run Detecting Clash in Parts Placement Switching Graphic Representations
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 6
Placing a Part in a Sub-document Query or Convert Auto Parts Adding and Managing Loose Parts Placing/Adjusting Access Plates Placing an Access Plate Adjusting an Access Plate Rotating an Access Part Managing Compartment Membership Updating Compartment Membership Resolving Membership Conflicts Querying Compartment Membership Locking Compartment Membership Flow Direction Display Flow Direction Changing Flow Direction Managing Spools Creating a Spool Display and Edit Properties of a Spool Select/Query a Spool or its Members Transfer a Spool Add/Remove Members in a Spool Rename a Spool Delete a Spool Analyzing Networks Analyze Network for Connections Viewing Related Objects Routing Tasks Aligning a Run to an Existing Surface Routing in 3D with the Compass Routing at an Offset of a Routable Edgeline: Routing Parallel to a Run Route a Run along a Spline Fix broken routables Building Piping Parts Creating a Part Define Graphic Representations for a Part Define Properties for a Part Change the Parameters of a Part Defining the Part Type Building a New Unique Reference Generating Resolved Parts from Parametric Parts Requirements for Building Parts Creating a Light Part Using ENOVIA Creating a Product Importing a Product Using Work Packages Saving a Work Package Organizing Work Packages Creating and Modifying Connectors
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 7
Create Connectors Creating Connectors on Light Parts Associate Attributes to a Connector Use the Compass to Manipulate Connectors Modifying or Deleting Connectors Creating Duplicate Connectors Using the Plane Manipulator Hide/Show Connectors Transferring a Document to Another Site Migrating V4 Models to V5 Creating a Directory Structure Exporting the V4 Project Registration Model Exporting the V5 Feature Dictionary Comparing the XML Output Importing the XML Output Exporting V4 Standards Data Exporting V4 Catalog Parts Exporting V4 Piping Lines Creating/Modifying Setup Data Migrating the V4 Model Exporting Parts from a V4 Model Importing Parts from Other Software Creating an Isometric Drawing Setup Requirements Creating an Isometric Drawing from a 3-D Document Generating a PCF File Using Mapping Tables Drawing Production Drawing Production Settings Generating a Drawing Defining 2D Endstyle Symbols Schematic Driven Design Placing Parts Using a Schematic Creating a Run Using a Schematic Analyzing Schematic Driven Design Penetration Management Usage Querying for Penetrations Creating a Cutout Sketch Adding an Object to a Penetration Adding Clash to a Penetration Creating a Penetration Creating a Penetration with Workflow Viewing and Editing Penetration Properties Showing Cutouts Hole Placement Placing a Hole on a Part Modifying a Hole Querying Hole Properties Working with Bendables Extract Bending Data from Bendable Pipes and Tubes
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 8
Design Checks for Bendable Pipes and Tubes Enabling Polyline Feature Computed Attributes Piping Customizing Customizing Settings ISOGen Setup (3-D) Setting Up the Application Project Resource Management Using the PRM Command Understanding Project Resource Management Checking a PRM File for Errors Organizing Resources in PRM File List of PRM Resources and Flags Feature Dictionary: Creating Classes and Attributes Mapping the Functional Physical Classes Defining User Names for Classes & Attributes Comparing Feature Dictionaries Opening a Document Without CATfct File Cache Mode Working in Cache Mode Penetration Management Penetration Management Setup Creating Reports Defining the Report Format Generating a Report Generating a Report from a Macro Creating a Toolbar Shortcut for a Macro Generate a Bolt Report Catalogs Creating a Catalog Creating Sub-Catalogs Modifying a Catalog Creating a Specifications Catalog Line ID Catalogs Displaying Line ID Properties in Catalog Modifying/Updating a Lines Catalog Standards and Design Rules Rules Overview Modifying Design Rules Creating and Modifying Standards Adding an Attribute to a Standard Modifying the Object Naming Rules Add Computed Attribute to Object Name Adding an Attribute to General Design Rules Adding a New Part Size Resource Map Using Knowledgeware Checks Using Knowledgeware Packages
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 9
Importing Checks from Knowledgeware (3D) Opening a Sample Document Checking a Document for Design Errors Defining Options Finding Sample Data on Various Platforms Specifications Tree Working with ENOVIA Setup for Enovia Using Catalogs Resources That Must be Placed in ENOVIA Workbench Description Design Create Toolbar Fabricate Toolbar Build Create Toolbar Piping Line Management Toolbar Design Modify Toolbar General Environment Toolbar General Design Toolbar Rename Toolbar Glossary Index
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 10
Preface
The Piping Design product provides customers with a complete set of tools to create, modify, analyze and manage physical designs of piping systems using industry standard conventions, terminology, and practices. The tools are focused on creating an intelligent piping layout that captures the design intent. Intelligent piping design allows users to create and validate their designs more productively and, in addition, reuse the captured intelligence for downstream design processes. The product supports the definition of piping configurations. This involves general layout tools for intelligent placement of parts, and automatic placement of components such as bends, elbows, tees, and reducers. A full set of routing and parts placement methods allows users to choose the one that is right for a given situation. Specification driven design is available to ensure compliance with the project standard. Function driven design is used to ensure that the design intent is available for any modification scenario. In addition, full capabilities are provided to quickly query design information, and generate appropriate report information. These design tools are provided via a highly intuitive and productive interface that allows the user to create, modify, and manage designs quickly. The product includes comprehensive and flexible setup functions that will provide a rapid way to define project standards and catalogs that get the users into production quickly. This product comes with a starter piping parts catalog based on the American National Standard Institute (ANSI). Together with other products, the Piping Design product gives users the power to manage their piping systems from initial design to ship or plant operations, in a completely flexible way.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 11
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 12
What's New?
New Functionality
You can add loose parts. The task also explains ways of managing loose parts that are associated with selected base parts. Adding insulation to a part and managing lists of insulation types is explained. Several tasks have been added in the Penetration Management section. These include tasks allowing you to show all the cutouts of a penetrated object; viewing penetration properties and editing values of attributes; adding clash to penetrations and creating penetrations.
Enhanced Functionality
You can define a different line type and line thickness for each graphic representation in an application. You can access a penetration (referenced in workflow activity) that has been assigned to you by viewing a list of penetration activities. A cutout sketch can be created for a penetration with several penetrating objects.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 13
Getting Started
The following short tutorial provides an introduction to the Piping Design product, It is intended to give you a feel for the product's capabilities in a few step-by-step scenarios, which are listed below. Entering the Workbench Set Correct Working Units and Grid Changing the Current Axis Creating a Run Placing a Part on a Run Updating Documents Saving Documents Using the Step Input Box and Construction Elements
These tasks can be completed in about 15 minutes. Certain functions will not work without setting up directory paths and options. The system administrator should refer to the tasks under Understanding Project Resource Management as well as platform dependent sample data in Finding sample data on various platforms. The task Setting Up the Application (in the Customizing section) describes the various steps you have to take, and the order in which you have to do them, to set up Piping Design.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 14
Before using many tasks you will need to set your options correctly. Refer to the Customizing section.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 15
3.
Now, scroll down the list in Magnitudes and select Area. Select the unit of measure you will be using for area. Note: This is normally consistent with the Length standard.
4. 5.
To set the Grid Step, under Options, select Equipment & Systems and click on the General tab. The Enter a value for the Grid Step field; for example, 1 ft. grid step is the increment used for snapping (to grid). Imagine a grid placed over your workspace, consisting of squares. The value you enter in this field becomes the distance between the lines of each square. If you enter 1 ft then when routing the run will extend by 1 ft at a time. Runs begin, end and turn at grid intersections (there are ways of overriding this). Similarly, when placing parts in free space (as opposed to on a run), they will place at grid intersections.
The grid step setting will display in the General Environment toolbar at the bottom of the 3-D viewer. You can change it in the toolbar during your session but the new value will only apply to your current session. If you close the application and reopen it, the toolbar will again display the value in the General tab page. These will be your default settings and will remain in effect until you change them. 6. Click the OK button to complete the customization of the working units.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 16
. 1. Click the Change Current Axis icon 2. Select the object you want to use as a reference. The axis for the selected object is displayed. You can also change the current axis and place the compass on the object. The compass allows you to manipulate that object. To do this click the Change Current Axis and Snap Compass button and select the object. The axis and compass are both placed.
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 17
Creating a Run
This task describes how to create a run. When you create a run you "reserve" space in your work area so that you can later lay pipes, ducts, etc., and place parts. In the example below you will create a run in "free space". In actual practice you will create runs in a much more controlled environment - the deck of a ship, or floor of a house, for instance. In the example below it does not matter where you begin or end a run - but when you are working on a project you will have to start and end at specific places, and your run will have to be a certain size and shape. For more information on runs and routing see Routing a Run. You will learn more about line IDs later, but you should know that a run is associated with a line ID. A line ID is an organizational element that identifies the type and nominal size of the run (e.g., piping, 6 in.) but may also include attributes such as pipe specification, design and operating temperature and pressure, insulation thickness, etc. These properties of the line ID ensure that the parts you place meet the requirements of the line ID and the intended design. Thus, when you make a run it is part of a line ID. The line ID of your run is displayed on the upper toolbar on the left hand side.
To learn more, including how to select a line ID, see Managing Piping Lines. . 1. Click the Route a Run button . The Run dialog box opens.
Note: If the Design Rule: Multiple Rule Found dialog box opens, this means there is more than one type of run to choose from. For example, there could be multiple choices for Turn Radius, Diameter Factor or Number of Miter Cuts. For this scenario the choice is unimportant because you are learning the fundamentals of creating a basic run. Select from the table and click OK. 2. In the Run dialog box select either Point-To-Point 3. . In Click the Section button. The Section dialog box opens showing the available section types Piping Design the section choices are No Section or Round Section. Leave this set to Round Section. Check to make sure the display setting is set to Solid . Click OK in the Section dialog box. or Orthogonal for the routing Mode.
This returns you to the Run dialog box. Section dimensions, Turn radius and Minimum length fields display the default values of the line ID being used. For more information on the settings and options used in the Run and Section dialog boxes see Routing a Run.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 18
4. To begin your run, click at any point, move the pointer in any direction, and click again. This is the first segment of the run. Now move the pointer to the next position and click. Create a simple run with three segments as show below.
6. You have created a run with three segments. You are now ready to place pipes and other parts in it.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 19
1. 2. 3.
With the run displayed, click the Place Piping Part button . The Place Piping Part dialog box displays (shown in Step 4). Click at the location where you want to place the part - you must do this before displaying the Class Browser, which is the next step. Click the Class Browser button (next to the Function Type field) to display the Class Browser. Double click on Piping Part Function to expand the list and click the + sign at Valve Function to expand the list of valve types.
4.
Select Control Valve Function. The function will display in the Place Piping Part dialog box.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 20
5.
In the Place Piping Part dialog box, click on the down arrow in the Part Type field to display a list of control valves and select the gate valve.
When there is only one part type it will be preselected. If the Part Type field is grayed out, click again on the location where you want to place the part. 6. If there is more than one part number for the Part Type you selected the Part Selection box will display. For this scenario, select from the list of 2 inch gate valves.
7.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 21
Updating Documents
This task contains information on updating documents. The connections in your design will not update automatically after you make certain changes to it, such as moving parts, runs or lofts. This behavior is by design, to enhance performance. In order to update your design document click the Force Update button .
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 22
Saving Documents
This task contains recommendations on saving your documents. Ways in which documents are saved are explained in the Infrastructure User's Guide - Creating, Opening and Saving Documents. You must read that documentation because the various methods are not explained here. This task simply suggests the methodology you should follow in specific circumstances. 1. If you are saving a document to a local machine or network drive it is recommended that you use the "Save Management" command initially. The Propagate Directory command (which is in the Save Management dialog box) should not be used routinely. It is meant to be used in specific circumstances, such as when you want to place all the contents of a document in one directory before sending it to another location. If you are saving a document to another site or network you should use the "Send To" command. In this case, you should be careful about the links for documents such as resolved parts folder or line ID. These links could change to reflect the local network drive to which the documents have been sent. You should make sure they point to the original location - using the Reset button in the Save Management dialog box is one way of doing this. You should check the active document before you execute the Save command . The root product must be the active document if you want to save everything under it.
2.
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 23
This allows you to snap to points that are multiples of the value entered in the step input box measured from the current axis (also called origin). As you move your mouse pointer a label displays the distances (coordinates) from the current axis in multiples of the value entered in the step input box. In the illustration below, the label is showing that the distance is 500 mm from the axis along the X axis, and 500 mm from the axis along the Y axis. When routing you can create segments whose length is in multiples of 500 mm only. Similarly, you can only place (or move) a resource at points that are measured in multiples of 500 mm from the axis. You can change the value in the step input box at any time.
This allows you to snap to points that are multiples of the value in the step input box measured from the last point at which you clicked. When you select this option the label first shows the distances from the current axis. After you click, it shows the distances from the last point where you clicked. You can change the value in the step input box after a click if you want to route a segment of a certain length or place a resource an exact distance away from where you last clicked.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 24
This option allows you to snap to the XY grids on a construction plane. You first create a grid using the Construction Planes command. If you have an XY grid you can only place resources at, or route to, the intersections of X and Y grids. If you have only X or Y grids you can only place resources at, or route to, the grid lines. 5. Click the Snap to all construction planes button.
Choosing this option allows you to snap to the X, Y or Z grids. 6. Click the Snap to elevation planes button.
Selecting this option allows you to snap to the elevation planes of a Z grid. In the illustration below the user is routing on the Z axis and snapping to the elevation planes of the Z grid.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 25
Use this option when attaching the drafting view of a 2D drawing to an area. You can snap to the elements of the 2D drawing. For instance, if you are attaching the 2D drawing of a conveyor belt to an area, choose this option to use the Conveyor Reservation function to select the drawing (you select by clicking on different elements of the drawing). This allows you to create an identical conveyor layout in 3D.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 26
User Tasks
The tasks for creating documents using the Piping Design product are explained here. Managing Piping Lines Routing Runs Modifying Runs Connecting Elements Manipulating Objects Query/modify properties of an object Placing & Modifying a Piping Part Placing/Adjusting Access Plates Managing Compartment Membership Flow Direction Managing Spools Analyzing Networks Routing Tasks Building Piping Parts Using ENOVIA Creating and Modifying Connectors Transferring a Document to Another Site Migrating V4 Models to V5 Creating an Isometric Drawing Drawing Production Schematic Driven Design Penetration Management Usage Hole Placement Working with Bendables Computed Attributes
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 27
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 28
Creating a Line ID
This task describes how to create a line ID. A line ID is a mechanism for identifying and organizing segments and the components and equipment you place in them. You need to create a line ID before you can begin routing and placing components and equipment. When you create a line ID, you also assign characteristics: material, size, pressure attributes, heat tolerance and so on. The line ID displays in the specifications tree as an organizational element. The routes you create and the components you place under it appear in the specifications tree, and display as 3D images. The Line ID appears in the specifications tree with the name you assigned it. Each run segment you route will show as ArrRunX, X being a unique number assigned in sequence. Components and equipment will show as YYYFunction.X, YYY being a component name, and X being a unique number (i.e. PumpFunction). To store line IDs that you create, set the default directory (as defined in the Project Management Resources) for read-write file permission. Contact your system administrator to add line IDs or directories for line lists. Also see the Customizing section for information about line ID catalogs. 1. Click the Create Line ID button . The Create Line ID dialog box displays.
2. 3.
Enter a name for the new line in the Line ID field, or you can accept the default name by clicking Set to default. You can enter a name in the Line ID Filename field. The Line ID Filename field is available only if you set Options as follows: From the menubar select Tools - Options - Equipment and Systems. Select the Design Criteria tab and check the option User Defined Filename. Every time you create a Line ID, a system file is created and stored in a catalog. If you do not enter a name in the Line ID Filename field, this file is generated with a unique and unrecognizable name. By entering a name in the Line ID Filename field, you can give the file a meaningful name.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 29
4.
You can choose not to store the line ID in the catalog, if you set Options as follows: Select Tools - Options - EquipmentandSystems. Select the Design Criteria tab and check the option Do Not Store the Line IDs in Catalog. To use the line ID, you must manually store it in the catalog. Click the Properties button to open the Properties dialog box. Select the appropriate tab for your application (for example, Tubing or Piping), and assign properties to the line ID. You must assign values to the Nominal Size and Specification attributes. You can choose to assign values to any of the other attributes on the Properties dialog box. Click Apply. Click OK to close the dialog box.
5.
6.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 30
Renaming a Line ID
This task shows you how to rename a Line ID. 1. Click the Rename Line ID button line IDs. . The Rename Line ID dialog box opens showing the list of
2. 3.
If you want to search for other line IDs, scroll through the list or enter a keyword in the Filter String field. Select the line ID you want to rename. The Rename dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 31
4.
5.
The box will display a name in the Default ID field. This name is based on preferences set by your system administrator. To use this name click the Set to default button. To use a different name enter it in the ID field. Click OK. Click OK again in the Rename Line ID box. The line ID will be renamed.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 32
2. Use the Sort and Filter options if you need to. Under Filter, select the Local option if you only want to filter line IDs in the document. Select All if you want to filter all line IDs available to you. Use of the Filter Attributes button is explained below. 3. If you are selecting members then select Line ID Members under Selection Type. If you want to select a line ID then select Line ID.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 33
4. Click to select a line ID in the Line ID list or click on one of the members. Either the line ID or the members will be selected, depending on the selection you made in Step 2.
5. Click the Filter Attributes button is you want to filter for line IDs. The Line Attribute Filter dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 34
6.
Click the drop down arrow in the Attributes field to select a property. Name is selected in the image above. Click the drop down arrow in the Operators field to select an operator. Most are obvious, such as == (equal to) or > (greater than). the operator *= means you are using a wild card. If you select this operator and enter U8 in the Values field then the function will filter for all lines beginning with U8. Select or enter a value in the Values field. This is the value that the function will filter for. Click Add when you have defined your query to add it to the Composed Query window. The And/Or buttons let you further refine your search. You can click the And button to add another query to your search. Clicking the Eraser button removes a query from the Composed Query window. The Filter String field allows you to enter a line ID name - you can use wild cards.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 35
Deleting a Line ID
This task shows you how to delete a Line ID. 1. Click the Delete Line ID button IDs contained in your document. . The Delete Line ID dialog box displays showing all the line
2. 3.
Select the line ID that you want to delete. (When you select a line ID all members that belong to it are highlighted.) If the line ID you selected has any members a message will display alerting you that all members belonging to that line ID will be deleted.
4.
Click OK. The line ID and all its members will be deleted.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 36
Only line IDs contained in your document will be deleted. The same line ID used in other documents will not be deleted unless you open those documents and follow the steps given above.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 37
This task shows how to import and/or update Piping Line IDs. The Import Line ID feature offers the user the utility of importing line IDs from existing databases in other CAD software products. The Update feature allows you to update the properties of existing line IDs with properties contained in an XML import file. Installation of the Document Type Definition (DTD) and knowledge of XML are prerequisite to using this feature. The file format for the Line ID XML Import File resides in the DTD. The location of the DTD and sample XML file is platform dependent. In Windows the path for the DTD is ...\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\SampleData\PlantShipLineIDImport.dtd. For the XML file, the path is ...\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\SampleData\PipingLineIDImportsample.xml. The paths for the other platforms are identical with the exception of the platform identifier. Shown below are the platforms with their respective identifiers.
G
Windows: ...\win_a\ AIX: .../aix_a/ HPUX: .../hpux_a/ IRIX: .../irix_a/ SOLARIS: .../solaris_a/
In all cases, copy the PlantShipLineIDImport.dtd and the PipingLineIDImportsample.xml file to a local directory with 'write access'. In the following scenario both the sample XML file and the DTD have been copied to a user Temp directory. A portion of the sample XML file is shown below:
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 38
Be alert to any line IDs you have created as well as the line IDs you will be importing. The properties of existing line IDs will be updated (replaced) with properties of line IDs of the same name upon import. The path for your line IDs is preset under Project Resource Management.
1. 2.
Click the Import Line ID button . The Line ID Import/Update dialog box opens. Click to open the file. This will cause the subroutine to run which will generate the line IDs from the XML file. Note that under Files of type, only XML files may be displayed and opened.
3.
Piping Design
4.
Click View output file to view the Line ID Import/Update Report for the sample case below.
Version 5 Release 16
Page 39
5. You can verify that the new line IDs have been imported by clicking the Select/Query Line ID button dialog box opens showing the updated and imported line IDs. . The Select/Query Line ID
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 40
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 41
2. 3. 4. 5.
Select the line ID whose properties you want to modify. Under Selection Type select Line ID. Click the Properties button. The Properties dialog box will display. Click on the Piping tab. Enter your changes for the attributes and click OK.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 42
2.
3.
Use the Sort and Filter options if you need to. Under Filter, select the Local option if you only want to filter line IDs in the document. Select All if you want to filter all line IDs available to you. The Filter String field allows you to enter a line ID name - you can use wild cards. Clicking the Filter Attributes button brings up the Line Attribute Filter dialog box. See Select/Filter Line IDs to learn more about filtering. To perform a query on a line ID click on the line ID in the Filtered Line ID List. The members of that line ID will be highlighted in the document. To query a member click on it in the document. All members that belong to the same line ID will be highlighted and the line ID will be highlighted in the dialog box.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 43
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 44
2. 3. 4. 5.
Select the line ID that you want to transfer a member to. (When you select a line ID, all members that belong to it are highlighted.) Click on the member that you want to transfer. It will be transferred to the line ID you had selected. You can also use a feature called multi-select to transfer several members at a time. To do this: Select the members you want to transfer by clicking and dragging. They will change color once selected. Click on the Transfer Line ID button . The Transfer Members of Line IDs dialog box opens.
6.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 45
7.
Select the line ID to which you want to transfer the members. You will be alerted that you are about to transfer the members.
8. Click OK. The members will be transferred. The line ID and member must be compatible for the transfer to take place.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 46
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 47
2.
Select the line ID you want to merge. All members that belong to that line ID will be selected. The lower field will display the line IDs to which it can be merged.
Select the line ID into which you want to merge and click OK. All members of the first line ID will merge into the line ID you selected, and the first line ID will be deleted. You cannot merge incompatible line IDs. Also, members of a line ID that is merged into another will assume the properties of the line ID into which it is merged. 3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 48
Routing Runs
Routing runs, including routing runs in special circumstances, are explained here. Routing a Run Routing with Defined Nodes Routing from the End of a Routable Branching a Run Routing a Run at a Slope Auto-route Between Equipment Route a Run Within a Pathway Routing from an Item Reservation Display Information About Routables Checking Turn Radius Errors
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 49
Routing a Run
This task shows you how to create a run. You can begin routing a run from: G Space.
G
An object, such as a tube. The end of a run or middle of a run. A point. Connectors. Item reservation face.
Design rules affect the way runs are routed. For instance, the turn radius of a run of a given nominal size is determined by the design rules. A sample set of design rules is included with this application, but most users (administrators, not individual users) will add to or modify them. Some ways in which rules affect run creation are explained below. See Rules Overview to find out which rules affected run creation. Also see Customizing - Standards and Design Rules - Modifying Design Rules for more information.
1. Click the Route a Run button The Run dialog box is displayed. .
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 50
2.
If the Schematic Driven option is set then the Schematic Browser will also display. This option is controlled from the Design Criteria tab - click Tools - Options, select Equipment & Systems, and select the Design Criteria tab. A Multiple Rule dialog box may also display. This is explained below and in the Design Rules section. Define the routing mode for the run:
Orthogonal: routing between two points will proceed first in the X direction, then in the Y direction.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 51
Branch at Center: see Branching a Run. In addition, if you place the compass on an object the Use Compass Origin button will display. If you click the button and start to route the route will start from the compass origin. If you are in the middle of routing, the compass origin will serve as a routing point. Click one of the Select Mode buttons - the default is No Filter. The Select Mode buttons allow you to define where you can start routing from.
No Filter: No filters are applied and you can route from any routable object or in space.
In Space: Routing will be in space. This is useful when you have a large object in the background, such as a ship structure, and you want to be able to route in space.
Only Part Connectors: Select this to be able to route from part or equipment connectors only.
Import Node Points: This allows you to route using predefined node points. See Routing with Defined Nodes for more information. Section dimensions, Turn radius and Minimum length fields display the values given to the Line ID being used. Click the Section icon. The Display buttons allow you to select a display mode of Line/Curve or Solid. Click the Display Centerline button to show the centerline of the run. This will appear as a dashed yellow line. In addition a blue line will appear to display the Set Point setting. This feature works in both the Line/Curve and Solid display modes.
When defining Section parameters the section Types that are available depend on which workbench you are in. For example, Piping Design, Tubing Design and Conduit Design use only the round section while Systems Routing (shown below) offers all section types.
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 52
a. Select the Section Type button. The Section dialog box is displayed.
b. Define the section type and corresponding parameters for each of them:
No Section
Piping Design
G
Version 5 Release 16
Page 53
Display
The Envelope field refers to the total work area needed. The section diameter is obtained from the line ID and equals the size of the pipe or tube you will place in the run. The envelope diameter includes additional space need for pipe insulation, etc. In the case of a round section the value is obtained from the Outside Diameter column of the XXXDimension design table.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 54
Instead of entering the type of run, the set point and the height, width or diameter in the Section dialog box, you can select an existing run in your document. Once selected, the Section dialog box will display the values for that run. To select, click on the Run button and then click on the run whose values you want as the default. Make sure the entire run is selected - not just a segment or a node. It will be easier to select the run in the specifications tree.
4.
if you want to use the intelligent design capabilities Click the Press to use rule button incorporated in the application. When you do this the turn radius and minimum length are governed by the nominal size you select - you will not be able to enter a different value. The nominal size is displayed in the menu bar, along with the Line ID to which the run will belong and the Specification. The turn radius and minimum length for that nominal size are in turn governed by the rules tables. If there is more than one attribute, such as turn radius, associated with that nominal size then you will be prompted to select one and the Multiple Rule dialog box will display. In the example below you can select from four possible options to define the bend radius of a run. You will still be able to override the bend definition on a specific node of a run. If the nominal size you select does not exist in the turn rule table then an elbow will be placed at the turns.
NominalSize: This is the nominal size you selected in the menubar. BendRadius: Also known as turn radius. This is the turn radius of the run and the different values displayed are taken from the Turn Rules design table. If the value is 0 then the application will calculate it as explained below.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 55
DiameterFactor: The diameter factor is a value used to calculate the turn radius of the run if no value for the Bend Radius attribute for a given nominal size is entered in the Turn Rules design table. The diameter factor multiplied by the Bend Diameter provides the turn radius of the run. (The Bend Diameter value is obtained from the Tube Dimension design table.) It is this calculated figure that will show in the Run dialog box. The application first determines if there is a value for a given nominal size in the Bend Radius column of the Turn Rules design table. If there is a value it will use that value. If there is no value then it will calculate it as explained above. NumberofMiterCuts: If the value is other than 0 then your elbows will be mitered. The number of miters will equal the value shown in the column plus 1. See Modifying Design Rules and Creating a Line ID for more information.
5.
If you decide not to use the rules then enter values for the minimum length and turn radius.
If you enter a minimum length or turn radius you will not be able to route correctly unless these values are satisfied. For instance, if you enter a minimum length of 10 feet, you will not be able to complete a segment that is 5 feet. In the illustration below, the green line shows the minimum segment length that will be created, even if you try to make a shorter segment, because the minimum length you entered is longer than the segment you are now trying to create. Similarly, if you enter a value for the turn radius, your run will automatically be adjusted to satisfy the defined turn radius.
6.
Click in the drawing to define the routing points. If you want the application to show you possible paths between two objects, then select your beginning and end points and click the Display Alternate Path button possible paths: . The first click displays a field showing the number of . Subsequent clicks show the actual paths.
7 Once you have a route you want to accept, click OK or the Create the Run button and the run will be created. If you click the button you can select another run. If you click OK you will exit the command. Click Cancel to abort your routing. You can also double-click on the last point to stop routing. In this case you will not be able to alternative paths.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 56
8. Click on the Close Loop symbol that shows at the beginning of the run if you want to create a closed loop run. In a closed loop run the ends of the run are joined. 9. When starting a run from a part, a run that is a continuation of an existing run, or if branching from an existing run use the following buttons as needed:
from.
Get Line ID from Selection: gets the line ID from the run or part you are routing
Get Line Size/Spec from Selection: gets the size and spec from the run or part you are routing from.
10. The Change to Schematic Mode button lets you toggle between schematic and nonschematic mode. You will exit the command when you click this button and need to click the Route Run command again.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 57
1.
Create a text file, using a text editor like Wordpad, with column headings as shown below, and define the node sequence, X/Y/Z coordinates and bend radius of the node points. A sample file is provided with this application to help you define the text file. The file name is RunInputNodeData.txt and the location is: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MultiDiscipline\SampleData. The file is reproduced below to show you the column headings and layout. (It has been opened in Excel to make it easier to distinguish columns.
You can see that there are two sets of node numbers, ranging from 1 to 4. Whenever the application reads the node number 1 it will start a new run. So, based on the file above, two runs will be created.
2.
Open the Run dialog box and click the Import Node Points button . The File Selection dialog box displays. Navigate to the location of your file and select it. The runs will be created.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 58
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 59
1. Select the Route a Run button The Routing dialog box is displayed. .
3. Move the pointer to the end from which you want to route. When a green arrow appears, click and begin to route. Double click to end routing.
4. Once you begin routing the following buttons are added to the Routing dialog box:
Continue Routing: If you select this the run you create will be part of the run from which you are routing.
Create New Route: If you select this the run you create will be a new run.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 60
5. When starting a run that is a continuation of an existing run, a branch from an existing run, or routing from an object or equipment (nozzle) use either or both of the following buttons as applicable:
Get Size/Spec from Selection: If you select this button the run you create will be a new run but will assume the size and specification attributes of the run or object you are routing from.
Get Line ID from Selection: If you select this button the run you create will assume the same line ID as the run or object from which you are routing. If you de-select it, the new run will belong to the line ID displayed in the menu bar.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 61
Branching a Run
This task explains how to branch a run from any of these elements: G Another run
G
If the "source" element (i.e., the element from which the run branches) is moved or resized, the run is adjusted accordingly. 1. With your document open, select the Route a Run button. The Routing dialog box is displayed. Define the parameters for the run. See Routing a Run for instructions. Select the element from which you want to route the run and begin routing.
2.
3. 4.
If you want to branch from the center of the segment, click the Branch at Center button in the Run dialog box. The branch will begin from the center of the segment, irrespective of the point in the segment that you route from. If you want to create a run that "branches" from the end of a run, see Routing from the End of a Routable.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 62
2.
3. Click the Section button and enter data about the type and size of run. 4. Continue creating your run. Click once to define the ending point of a segment. Click twice to end the run. Slope routing is intended for shallow rise or fall - usually 30 degrees or less. Use directional routing for sharper angles - more than 30 degrees.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 63
5. 6. 7.
Click to select the starting point of the run. Move the cursor to the second equipment, where the arrow will also display, and click to select the ending point of the run. The run is created over the shortest possible path. Press the shift key to see other possible routes for the run between the two objects.
Piping Design
1. 2. 3.
With your pathway model open, click the Route Thru a Pathway button
Click the Section button to open the Section dialog box. Select the type of run, the set point and other options. Click on the pathway in which you want to route your run. This displays set points on the pathway. Select a position for the run by clicking on one of the points. For example, if you select Top Center the run will align to the top center of the pathway. You can click Apply in the Run dialog box to see how the run looks and to try different positions. Click OK when you are finished.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 65
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 66
The point on the item reservation face from which the run will start depends on the set point of the run. In the illustration above the set point is set at Center Center. If the set point was set at Bottom Center the run would have started at the bottom center edge of the item reservation. To change the set point, button in the Run dialog box and select the Set Point from the drop click on the Section Type down list in the Section dialog box that displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 67
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 68
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 69
If a run is already selected it will display in the window. 2.Select one of the options: G Current selection lets you select runs in your document.
G
All runs under the active parent in the specifications tree. All runs created under a particular Line.
3.After you make your selection, the runs will display in the window in the Turn Rule Used column with their status indicated by a YES or NO - NO means one or more turns in that run does not conform to the turn rules.
If you click the Select All NO button then all runs that are in violation of the turn rules will be selected.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 70
4.Select the run you want to validate in the dialog box window - the run will highlight in the viewer. Click the Run Details button to see information about the run in the Run Details dialog box.
If you want to reset some of the turns in a run then select them in the Run Details dialog box and click the Reset Run . The turn radius for the selected turns will be reset according to the design rules. If the line has more Turns button than one turn radius or diameter factor then the Multiple Rule Found dialog box will display. Select one of the values - it will apply to the selected turns. 5.If you want to reset all the turns in a run then select the run in the Validate Run Turns dialog box and click the Reset Run Turns button. (If the line has more than one turn radius or diameter factor then the Multiple Rule Found dialog box will display. Select one of the values.) All turns in the run will be reset according to the design rule.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 71
Modifying Runs
Runs can be modified in the following ways. Using the Definition Dialog Box Changing a Section Changing the Angle of a Segment Moving Nodes Align Adjacent Segments Make Segment Parallel to Reference Plane Make Segment Parallel to Compass Base Plane Make Segment Parallel to Z Axis Fit Segment for Parts Assembly Position Segment Relative to a Plane Create an Offset Connection Between Segments Create a Closed Loop Run Open a Closed Run Adjust Extremities of a Run Transfer Run to Another Document
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 72
3. The Name field allows you to change the routable's instance name. 4. The Section button lets you change section parameters, as explained in Routing a Run. 5. Click one of the Turn Type buttons if you want to change the turn type. G No Turn: The turn radius for all turns is changed to 0. The Turn Radius field is not displayed.
G
Uniform Turn: All turns in the run have the same turn radius. Mixed Turn: Turns in the run can have different turn radius.
6. The Press to Use Rule button indicates if you are using the design rules. In the image above it is on, which is why the Turn Radius and Minimum Length fields are grayed out. You can click the button to go to a no-rule state, in which case the Turn Radius and Minimum Length fields will no longer be grayed out. See Routing a Run for more information.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 73
7. The Display Error Report button is green when there is no error in the run. It turns red when you insert a value or make some other change to cause an error. Click the button to display a report. This error function checks to make sure that the turn radius and minimum length conform to the design rule. 8. The Turn Radius field displays the turn radius. To change it you need to display the Node Definition dialog box (see Moving Nodes) and enter a value. If you introduce an invalid turn radius, by entering a value in the Node Definition dialog box, then the Display Error Report button will turn red. (You can also introduce a turn radius error by shortening the length of one or both segments.) A red arc will also display on your run. The ends of the arc are the minimum point to which each segment should be routed for a valid turn. In the example below, the segment is not long enough to support the turn radius value entered by the user.
9. The Node Edit Table button displays a table containing node values - see Moving Nodes. 10. The Minimum Length field displays the minimum length of each segment. You cannot change the value in this field if you are using design rules. 11. The Total Length field displays the total length of the run. You cannot change the value in this field.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 74
Changing a Section
This task explains how to change parameters that control how the section of an element is displayed. 1. Place your cursor over the element and click the right mouse button. 2.
From the pull-down menu, select the element or object you want to modify and select Definition. The Run Definition dialog box is displayed.
3. Click the Section button to set the desired section shape to No section, Rectangle, Round, Flat Oval, Radius Corner or Double Ridge.
When defining the Section parameters the section Types that are available depend on which workbench you are in. For example, Piping Design, Tubing Design and Conduit Design use only the round section while Systems Routing offers all section types. 4.
If you select Rectangular Section, you can define or change these parameters: G Set Point
G
If you select Round Section, you can define or change these parameters:
G
If you select Flat Oval Section, you can define or change these parameters:
G
If you select Radius Corner Section, you can define or change these parameters:
G
Piping Design
G
Version 5 Release 16
Page 75
If you select Double Ridge Section, you can define or change these parameters:
G
5. Click OK on the Section dialog box and OK on the Definition box to complete the change..
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 76
Place the compass on a 3-D element and adjust the Z axis to the angle you want. Right click on the segment. A pop-up menu will show. Click on Rotate section to compass Z direction. The normal of the section will rotate to align with the Z axis, as shown in the image below.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 77
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 78
3.
To move a node by entering coordinates, do one of the following: G Right-click the node symbol and select Definition from the pop-up menu. The Node Definition dialog box displays.
Key in new values for X, Y, or Z. Click OK in the Node Definition dialog box.
4.
OR Bring up the (run) Definition dialog box and click the Node Edit Table button to display the Node Edit Table and make changes to values in the table. To move the node using the cursor, place the cursor over the node symbol and drag it to a new location. See below.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 79
5.
A node will move parallel to the compass base plane, which is normally XY. To move a node vertical to the base, change the compass base to the XZ plane. 6. To move a node parallel to the compass Z axis. G Bring up the Definition box for the routable.
G
Place the compass on a 3-D object where it can be manipulated. Change the Z axis to the desired direction. Click on the square around the node and move it with the mouse button depressed. It will only move parallel to the compass Z axis. If you click on the node itself you will be able to move it in any direction.
7.
To move a node of a routable to the origin of the compass. This allows you to move the compass to a specific point on a routable or resource, and then move the node to it. To do this: G Bring up the Definition box for the routable which has the node you want to move.
G
Move the compass to the point where you want the node to move. Bring up the Definition box for the node that will be moved.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 80
8.
To delete a node right-click on the node and select Delete Node from the pop-up menu that displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 81
1. 2. 3.
Bring up the Definition dialog box for the run. Right click on the segment half closest to the misaligned joint. If more than one joint is misaligned click on a segment half closest to one of the end joints. A drop down menu will appear. Click on Align adjacent segments in the drop down menu. All segments will align beginning at the joint closest to the segment handle you selected. Segments will align in one direction only. If there are other misaligned segments in the run then you may have to repeat the operation.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 82
1. Click on the Offset Plane button and then on the face where you want to place it. A square
shows on the face. 2. Bring up the Definition dialog box for the run. 3. Bring up the Definition dialog box again, this time for the segment half you are interested in. See note below. Each segment is divided into two halves, which become visible when you bring up the Definition dialog box for the run. It is important to select the segment half correctly because the segment will pivot at the node closest to the segment half you select.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 83
4. Click on the Reference Plane button in the Segment Definition dialog box. The segment will pivot - at the node closest to the segment half you selected - to become parallel with the reference plane.
In the illustration above, the portion in red was the segment half selected. If the half to the left of it had been selected then the segment would have pivoted at the node to the left of it, as shown below.
5.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 84
2. 3.
Bring up the Definition dialog box for the run. Bring up the Definition dialog box again, this time for the segment half you are interested in. See note below. Each segment is divided into two halves, which become visible when you bring up the Definition dialog box for the run. It is important to select the correct half, because the segment will pivot at the node closest to the segment half you select. 4. Click on the Compass Base Plane button. The segment will pivot - at the node closest to the segment half you selected - to become parallel with the reference plane.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 85
In the illustration above, the portion in red was the segment half selected. If the half to the left of it had been selected then the segment would have pivoted at the node to the left of it, as shown below.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 86
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 87
2.
Right-click on the segment half that you want to shorten. A drop down menu will display.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 88
3.
Click Adjust to fit. The elbow will move flush against the tee.
The same command can be used to create a U. If you have a segment with bends at the two ends and you use the command described above, the segment will shorten so that the two bends are adjacent. It will not work if there are no bends.
If you have two connected parts, like a valve and a flange, and you want to move both after they have been placed, select both first. Then, when you move any one part both will move together.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 89
2. Place the offset plane on top of the beam and bring up the Definition dialog box for the routable. Right-click on the segment you want to move. A drop down menu will display. Select Offset segment.
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 90
4.
Select Offset segment. The Offset segment dialog box will appear.
5.
Select Make segment parallel to reference plane and then select one of the buttons, Outside edge to reference plane or Center line to reference plane. See Step 9 to offset to another segment.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 91
6.
Enter a distance in the Offset field. If you enter 0 the routable will be placed on top of the beam if you have selected Outside edge to reference plane. If you select Center line to reference plane then entering 0 in the Offset field will place the center line of the routable on top of the beam. Click the Offset to far side or Offset to near side button. These buttons will place the routable on either side of the reference plane. Click Preview if you want to preview, then click OK and then OK again in the Definition dialog box. The run segment will be placed on top of the beam.
7.
8.
9.
To position a segment a certain distance from another segment, select the Offset to another segment option and click the segment to which you want to offset. Click one of the three buttons: Outside edge to outside edge, Center line to center line or Center line to outside edge.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 92
2. Select the segment you want to be the slave. The first segment you select becomes the slave, while the second becomes the master. 3. Select the second segment. The compass displays and you can see a connector line between the two.
4. Enter the offset distance and select your offset between options in the Run box. You can choose to have the offset connection between the:
G
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 93
5. To create a connection between other segments of the same two routables select other segments in the same sequence given above. 6. Click OK. The connections will be created. 7. To modify the connection, select the slave run, click the Create offset segment connection button , select the slave segment and enter your changes. 8. To delete offset connections select the slave routable, right click, then click on the line corresponding to the routable and click Delete offset connections. All connections between the two routables will be deleted.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 94
6. The two ends of the run will join. An open end run and closed loop run are shown below.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 95
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 96
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 97
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 98
2. Click and drag the connector symbol at the end of the section to reposition it. The image below shows the repositioned extremity. Notice that the Total length in the Definition dialog box has changed to reflect the adjusted length.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 99
3. Click Apply and OK. The run will now extend to the selected position.
4. The other method uses the Adjust Run Extremity command. With your document open, click the Adjust Run Extremity button . The Adjust Run Extremity dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 100
5. Select the run extremity you want to adjust. The run is highlighted and the Adjust Options become available.
6. Click the down arrow in the Adjust Options field and select one of the options. You can: G Move to connector: Move the extremity to a connector.
G
Move to point: Move it to a point on a part or equipment. You see the points as you move your pointer over the part. Move to x ,y, z coordinate: Move to a specific coordinate. Enter the coordinates in the fields that display. Move to run and keep alignment: Move to another run - the extremity is moved to that plane, not connected. Move to part and keep alignment: Move to a part - the extremity is moved to that plane, not connected.
7. Click OK to end.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 101
2. Click the Transfer Run button . The Transfer Run dialog displays and you are prompted to select the run you want to transfer. 3. Select the run, at which time the Apply and OK buttons in the Transfer Run dialog box become available.
4. Click on the down arrow in the File name field to see documents that are directly under the top level product. Select the document you want to transfer the run to in this list or in the specifications tree. NOTE: If you have a third level document you will need to select it in the specifications tree.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 102
5. Click Apply or OK. The run is transferred to the document you selected.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 103
Connecting Elements
This task explains how to connect and disconnect elements. Connecting Parts Disconnecting Parts Connections Between Work Packages Managing Publications
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 104
Connecting Parts
This task shows you how to connect two or more parts or runs. You can use this function to connect parts or runs. Select the part that you want to connect. Press the Ctrl key while selecting the other parts. Click the Connect 1. Parts button .
2. The parts will be highlighted and the Action dialog box will open. Click OK to connect the parts. The parts will be connected.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 105
3. To verify that the the parts are connected, use the Analyze Networks function. Select the Path tab. Select the extremities of the range of parts you connected. The From Object and To Object fields will display the parts selected and the Current Path field will show 1, indicating that the three items are connected. 4. You can also connect by clicking the Connect button and selecting the connectors on two parts. In this case the first part you select becomes slave to the second part.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 106
Disconnecting Parts
This task shows you how to disconnect two parts or runs. In the specifications tree, select the part that you want to disconnect. Press the Ctrl key while selecting the other parts. 1. Click the Disconnect Parts button .
2. The parts will be highlighted and the Action dialog box will open. Click OK to disconnect the parts. The parts are disconnected.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 107
3. To verify that the parts are disconnected, use the Analyze Network function. Select the extremities of the range of parts you connected. The From Object and To Object fields will display the parts selected. The Current Path will show 0, and there will be no objects in the path; indicating that the three items are disconnected.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 108
Publication based linking enables effective configuration management, revision management and concurrent engineering support. Publication based connections are established through a publication and can easily be replaced by new configurations or revisions of a work package. The connection is resolved dynamically as work packages are loaded into a session. Document based connections use a more direct linking mechanism. This allows the linked document to be identified more easily, but it does not easily support relinking to a new configuration or revision. In publication based linking, connection information is added to both work packages, establishing a one way or two way link. A two way link is established when the system has Write access to both work packages. If it has Write access to one of the work packages it will establish a one way connection from the work package to which it has access. Users can convert a one way link to a two way link if they have Write access to the necessary work package, using the Cross Document Connections command. It is recommended that a two way connection be established to ensure complete network connectivity for downstream processes such as From-To analysis. In the case of document based connections, the connection is stored in the parent document of the two work packages. In this case, a two way connection is always established.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 109
Managing Publications
This task explains ways you can manage publications. You should also refer to the following tasks for more information: Using Work Packages and Connections Between Work Packages. Publications are used to identify work packages that have linked elements, for instance, when a vessel is in one work package and the pipe routed from it in another. In such cases publications are automatically created and used to track connected elements. Using the Manage Logical Publications command, and an associated command, Cross Document Connections, you can manage the publications. Both are explained below. Select the work package for which you want to manage publications and click Tools - Manage Logical 1. Publications in the menubar. The Manage Logical Publications dialog box displays, with all publications in the document listed. The box shows the publication name, the element to which it is associated, the associated connector and whether it is linked or unlinked.
2.
You can perform the following functions (you must have Write access to the work package): G Rename: To rename, double click on a publication and enter the new name.
G
Reset: Click the Reset button to reset to the original publication name. Delete: Select a publication and click the Delete button.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 110
3.
To use the cross document connections command, select a work package and click Analyze - Cross Document Connections in the menubar. The Cross Document Connections dialog box displays, showing the publications in the document.
4.
The buttons become available when you select a publication. In the image above, the symbol in the Link Type column shows the publication has a two way connection. You can perform the following functions (some functions require Write access to both work packages): G Remove Link: This will remove a connection one way and the following symbol will display.
Add Link: When you have a one way connection, click this button to make it a two way connection. Disconnect: Click this button to remove the connection. Use the Reframe, Select All or Clear Selection buttons as needed.
You can also use the Connect Parts and Disconnect Parts commands to add or remove connections.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 111
Manipulating Objects
This section explains some ways in which objects and resources are manipulated. Search for Objects in a Document Aligning Elements Distributing Elements Rotate Resource Using the Definition Dialog Box Snap Resources Together Quick Snap Resources Snap and Rotate a Resource Using Offset Planes and Advanced Offset Planes Generating Detail Information Disable/Enable Manipulation Handles Using Quick Translate to Move Objects Activating the Product or Parent Transfer Elements to New Document Moving In-Line Parts Rotating In-Line Parts Snapping Parts to a Run Defining the Rotation Axis in Free Space
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 112
Under Workbench select your workbench. Under Type select the type of object you are searching for. Detailed instructions on using the Search function can be found in the Infrastructure User Guide under Basic Tasks Selecting Objects.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 113
Aligning Elements
This task shows you how to align elements in your layout. You can align the center or the sides of an element to a user defined reference plane that you define. You can also rotate an element to align it with a reference plane. 1. 2. Select the element(s) that you want to align. Select the icon for the type of alignment you want to perform:
Distribute: See Distributing elements 3. Define the plane to use as a reference for the alignment. If you have an offset plane already defined it will be used as the reference plane. If you do not already have the offset plane defined do the following: a. Place your cursor over a geometric element that defines the plane (e.g., a construction plane, boundary, area contour, item reservation). As you move the cursor, a small white rectangle is displayed to show the selectable planes, as shown below. A line normal to the rectangle shows the direction in which the alignment will be performed.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 114
If you do not see the white rectangle, zoom out from the drawing. The white rectangle cannot be displayed if the element under your cursor is displayed too small. b. Click to select the plane. The selected elements are aligned along the plane.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 115
Using the Align Planes command allows you to select any plane on an item reservation or part. After you select the first plane to which to align to, you can only select a plane that is parallel to it. For instance, if you select the the top of an item reservation you need to select the top or bottom of the second item reservation - you cannot select the sides. Click any button in one of the tool bars to exit the alignment command. If you want to continue with the alignment command using the same reference plane then select another element in the model. 4.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 116
Distributing Elements
This task shows you how to distribute elements within parameters that you define. 1. Select the elements you want to move. 2. Click the Distribute button . 3. Define a reference plane for the distribution by doing the following: a. Place your cursor over a geometric element that defines the plane (e.g., a construction plane, boundary, area contour, item reservation). As you move the cursor, a small white rectangle is displayed to show the selectable planes, as shown below. A line perpendicular to the rectangle shows the direction in which the distribution will be performed.
If you do not see the white rectangle, zoom out from the drawing. The white rectangle cannot be displayed if the element under your cursor is displayed too small.
Piping Design
b. Click to select the plane.
Version 5 Release 16
Page 117
The selected elements are distributed along a line perpendicular to the plane, as shown below.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 118
3. 4.
Enter the degrees in the Rotation field. Click Apply and the resource will rotate on its vertical axis.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 119
1. 2.
To snap resources together by creating new connectors, click the Snap button
Click one of the resources you want to snap together. The resource changes color and the Define Reference Plane (From) dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 120
By default the Define Plane button is selected, allowing you to select a plane for the connector you will create. See Creating Connectors for information about using the Define Plane functions. The two resources will have a Master-Slave relationship to each other - but only if you choose to add a constraint (see below). If you add a constraint the first object you select becomes the slave, and the second object becomes the master. Also note that the first resource you select will move to snap - the second resource you select remains stationary. 3. Select the second resource. The Define Reference Plane (To) box will display - make your selections as explained above. You can also select an existing connector. Click OK when done. The two resources will snap together and the Constraint Options dialog box will display. 4. You can clear the Align, Face and Orientation check boxes and click OK if you want the two resources to remain snapped together without any new connectors being created. To add one or more constraints - which will also result in creating connectors - follow the steps given below. Make your selections in the Snap Options box.
5.
Align: You can increase distance between the two resources, but if you change the alignment the
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 121
slave will snap back to the original alignment. In the image below the distance is increased but the alignment remains the same.
Face: The two resources will maintain the face if you move one of them. In the image below the two maintain the same face, though the alignment has changed.
Orientation: The two connectors will maintain the same orientation if you move them, i.e. the red arrows visible in the connectors will align. It is therefore important to make sure that the red arrows in the connectors are pointed correctly and oriented correctly with reference to the part. The red arrow is usually set to the "Up" position of the resource, which means that on both resources they should point in the Up direction. If the red arrow points "down" in one resource and "up" in the other, then the resources will snap together incorrectly. You can toggle the position of the red arrow by clicking on the green arrow that is parallel to the plane. Fix in space: If you select this option the position of the master resource is fixed - if it is moved it will snap back to its original position. Attach: Checking this option allows you to attach the two objects. Place manipulator at snapped location: Check this if you want to rotate the snapped object after placing it. The manipulator is placed on the object if you check this. You can then click on the bottom curve of the manipulator (see image below) and rotate the object. It will rotate in increments, based on the value entered in the Snap Angle field. In the image above it is 45 degrees.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 122
To remove a constraint select it in the specifications tree and delete it. To remove the 'Fix in space' option right click on the Fix line in the specifications tree, click Properties, go to the Constraints tab, and uncheck the Fix in space box. 6. Click OK when done. 7. To snap resources together using preexisting connectors: a. Click the Snap button. b. Move the pointer over the first resource - the connectors will display. Select the connector. c. Move the pointer over the second resource - the connectors will display. Select the connector and the two resources will snap together. d. The Snap Options box will display. Make your selections and click OK.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 123
Center of polygon: the snapping point will be the center of any surface indicated by you. Surface: the snapping point is at any point indicated by you.
To snap resources together using the center of three points on a circle method, click the Snap Three Points button 1. 2. .
Click the resource that you want to move. Note: G If you click the resource at a connector it will snap to the other resource at that connector. You can create a connector if you want to.
G
If you click the resource at a point other than a connector it will join to the other resource at its origin. If the resource was preselected when you clicked the snap command you will not be able to select a connector.
These points apply to all three methods of Quick Snap. In the image below the user wants the paint gun to snap to the robot arm. After he clicks the paint gun the compass displays at the origin of the paint gun to show that the part will snap at that location. You can choose not to display the compass at the snap location by unchecking the option Place compass at snapping point in the Snap Options dialog box. The box displays when you click on any of the Quick Snap buttons. Placing the compass at the snapping location allows you to rotate the resource after it has snapped.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 124
3.
Define the point on the robot where you want the paint gun to snap, in this case the end of the robot arm, by clicking on three points. You can only select your defining points on the edges of a circle. Only points on the ends of edges are selectable. Note: If you click the three points clockwise the paint gun will attach "inward" as shown in the image below:
If you click counter clockwise then the paint gun will attach "outward", which is the correct position in this example.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 125
4. To Quick Snap using the center of polygon method, click the Snap Center of Polygon and perform the action detailed in Step 2. 5. button
Select the snapping point on the second resource by clicking on a surface. The resource will be placed in the center of the polygon.
6. To Quick Snap using the surface method, click the Snap Surface detailed in Step 2. 7. button and perform the action
Select the snapping point on the second resource by clicking on any surface. The resource will be placed at the point you click.
If you double click a command you will be in repeat mode. This allows you to snap a resource to a different location, using a different selection method if you want.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 126
2. Click on the second resource. A white square will appear. Move the pointer over the resource and click when the white square is at the location where you want to snap the two resources. The orientation symbol will appear at the location and the Define Reference Plane dialog box will display.
Piping Design
3.
Version 5 Release 16
Page 127
Click on the Define plane using compass button snap the two resources.
4. Click OK on the Define Reference Plane box. The two resources will snap together.
5. Click on the Select button to exit the Snap command. Click on the resource you want to rotate, then grab one of the handles on the compass with your pointer and move it. Different handles will move/rotate the resource in different directions.
You can also double click on the compass to bring up the Compass Manipulation dialog box and enter the required figure in the Angle field. Click on the + or - sign next to the Z axis to rotate it.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 128
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 129
If you do not see the white rectangle, zoom out from the drawing. The white rectangle cannot be displayed if the element under your cursor is displayed too small. b. Click to select the plane. The white rectangle changes to a blue rectangle, and remains displayed on the reference element, as shown below.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 130
The reference plane can now be used as a reference to position other elements. 3. Use the advanced offset plane feature to set your plane reference, origin and orientation settings as follows: a. Click the Advanced Offset Plane button. The Define Plane dialog box will display.
b. The Define Plane button is selected by default. However, you can select any button in the Define Plane box. Click when you have found a location. The plane manipulator displays.
Click on the buttons in the Define Plane dialog box to make your selections. See Creating Connectors on using the buttons. c. Click OK when done. The reference plane will be created.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 131
1. With your document open, click the Analyze Item button . 2. Move the pointer in the document highlighting various objects. Attributes and their values are displayed, depending on the type of object highlighted. In the illustration below the pointer is on a tubing tee.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 132
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 133
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 134
Point-to-Point. The From object point matches the point on the To object. Point-to-Line. The From object point is the orthogonal projection of the point on the To object line. Point-to-Plane. The From object point is the orthogonal projection of the point on the To object plane. Plane-to-Plane. The From object plane matches the plane on the To object. The two planes must be parallel. Plane-to-Point. The new From object point is the orthogonal projection of the To point object on the From object plane. Line-to-Point. The new From object point is the orthogonal projection of the To object point on the From object line. The new From object point matches the point on the To object. Connector-to-Connector
An object moved using this command does not rotate. If translating parts on a run, the part must not be connected to a stretchable part like a pipe or a bendable.
1. With your document open, click the Quick Translate button . The Translate dialog box displays.
2.
When you click the Point button, you can select Point, Line, or Plane as the To element.
When you click the Line button, you can select only Point as the To Element. (The other To Element buttons are not active.)
When you click the Plane button, you can select Point or Plane as the To Element. (The other To Element buttons are not active.) After clicking a From element button, select the From object in your document. Click the appropriate To element button, then select the To object in your document.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 135
3.
Select the From object connector in your document. You can change the value in the Distance field. The value you enter is the Distance the From object will move in the compass Z direction. You can add an offset value in the Offset field. This value represents the distance between the two objects after a move. Click the To element Connector button. Select the To object connector in your document and click OK. The From object moves to the To object based on the selected Distance and Offset. You can use the Quick Translate command with only one object.
4.
Select the From object connector in your document. If necessary, change the value in the Distance field. Click the To element Connector button and click OK. The From object moves in the compass Z direction.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 136
The From object moves to the To object and the two planes are parallel.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 137
Click the To element Connector button and select the To object Connector.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 138
The blue line extending from the compass indicates the direction and distance the From object will move. (You can change the distance and the offset and the blue line will adjust accordingly.) Click OK.
The From object moves the distance indicated in the Distance and Offset fields.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 139
2.
If you want to activate an object then click on the object, in the specifications tree or viewer. If you want to activate the object's parent, then click the checkbox Activate Product's Parent and select the object. The parent will be selected and highlighted in the specifications tree.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 140
2. You can select elements to transfer in various ways: G Click the element you want to transfer. Click the Select Elements in Range Networks dialog box that displays. Click the Select Spools button and make your selection in the Analyze
3. If you do not want to transfer some elements in the Selection List, select the element(s) and click Remove. Remove All removes all elements.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 141
4. Make your selections. Spools and Lines will display the existing name in the File Name field. You can edit this name, or add a Prefix or Suffix (or both) to distinguish it from the original name. Elements do not display any name - you need to enter a name. In this example it is TestTransfer. The image below shows the entries in the specifications tree, with the Equipments node expanded, before the transfer.
5. The vessel has been selected for transfer (the associated nozzle will automatically be selected). Click Apply or OK. Apply allows you to transfer more elements. OK exits you from the command. The image below shows the transferred equipment.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 142
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 143
You use the buttons and drop-down lists on the Move/Rotate dialog box to perform various tasks. 2. To move and offset a physical part, click the Move Physical Parts on Run button .
Select the part in your document. An offset plane displays on one end of the in-line pipe.
Enter the required offset in the Offset Value field. (Key-in Offset must display in the Options dropdown list.) The offset is measured from the end of the in-line bendable where the offset plane displays. Click anywhere in your document and the part moves according to the selected offset.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 144
To toggle the offset plane to either end of the segment, click the Toggle Offset Plane button You can make measured movements of the part in either direction. To move the part to next connector location, click the Move to Next Connector Location button . Click OK to complete the task and close the Move/Rotate dialog box. 3. You can move a part and align it with another element or with a plane.
Select either Intersect Two Elements or Intersect Connector and Plane from the Options dropdown list. (Make sure you click the Move Physical Parts on Run button.)
To move a part and align it with another element, select the part that you want to move, and select Intersect Two Elements from the Options drop-down list. Select a connector on the part you want to move.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 145
Select the connector on the other element. The part moves and aligns with the element.
Click OK to complete the task and close the Move/Rotate dialog box. To move a part and align it with a plane, select the part that you want to move, and select Intersect Connector and Plane from the Options drop-down list. Select a connector on this same part, then select the connector on the plane. The part moves and aligns with the plane. Click OK to complete the task and close the Move/Rotate dialog box.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 146
synchronize the angle of rotation of two parts. rotate an in-line part and align it with another element. use the compass to rotate a part and set the angle of rotation. rotate connected parts at the same time.
Defining the Rotation Axis in Free Space explains how to define the rotation axis of a part in free space. Moving In-Line Parts explains how to move and offset in-line parts. Piping parts are used here for illustration purposes. The procedure is the same for other types of parts. 1. With your document open, click the Move/Rotate Part on the Run button dialog box displays. . The Move/Rotate
You use the buttons and drop-down lists on the Move/Rotate dialog box to perform the various tasks.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 147
2. To enter the angle of rotation, select the part you want to rotate.
Make sure Key-in Angle displays in the Options drop-down list. Enter the angle of rotation (a positive or a negative value) in the Angle Value field. Click anywhere in your document and the part rotates to the angle of rotation.
To toggle the angle of rotation entered in the Angle Value field from positive to negative, click the Reverse Entered Angle button .
Click OK to complete the task and close the Move/Rotate dialog box. 3. To synchronize the angle of rotation of two parts, select the part you want to synchronize with another part.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 148
Select Synchronize Part Orientation from the Options drop-down list on the Move/Rotate dialog box.
Now select the other part. The first part rotates to the angle of rotation of the second part.
Click OK to complete the task and close the Move/Rotate dialog box.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 149
4. To rotate an in-line part and align it with another element, select the part you want to align with the other element. Select Intersect Two Elements from the Options drop-down list on the Move/Rotate dialog box. Select a connector on the part you want to align.
Select a connector on the other element. The first part rotates and aligns with the second part.
Click OK to complete the task and close the Move/Rotate dialog box. You can now create a two-segment run.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 150
5. To use the compass to rotate a part and align it with the angle of rotation of any surface parallel to the rotation axis, select the part you want to rotate.
Select Rotate to Compass Z direction from the Options drop-down list. Drag the compass and place it on the other surface.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 151
The first part rotates and aligns with the Z direction of the compass. Manipulate the compass to change the Z direction. The part rotates in the same direction, and the Angle Value field continually updates the angle of rotation. Click OK to complete the task and close the Move/Rotate dialog box. 6. To rotate connected parts at the same time, select one of the parts you want to rotate.
Click the Include Connected Parts button All connected parts are now selected.
Enter an angle of rotation in the Angle Value field. Click anywhere in your document and all the connected parts rotate to the angle of rotation.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 152
Click OK to complete the task and close the Move/Rotate dialog box.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 153
Moving In-Line Parts explains how to move and offset in-line parts. Rotating In-Line Parts explains various ways to rotate in-line parts and set the angle of rotation. Piping parts are used here for illustration purposes. The procedure is the same for other types of parts. 1. With your document open, click the Move/Rotate Part on the Run button dialog box displays. . The Move/Rotate
2. To move a part in free space and snap it to a run (and create a connection), select Snap to Run's Extremity from the Options drop-down list. Point to the part that you want to move and select a connector.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 154
The part moves and snaps to the run extremity, and creates a connection.
Click OK to complete the task and close the Move/Rotate dialog box. 3. To move supports (such as hangers) that have come off a modified run, and snap them back to the run, select Snap Support(s) to Run in the Options drop-down list in the Move/Rotate dialog box. Select the modified run. This also selects the supports that are off the run.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 155
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 156
2. To define the rotation axis of a part in free space, select the part. An error message displays. Click OK to close the message. Point to the part in free space and connectors display.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 157
Select a connector to define the rotation axis. Click the up or down arrow keys on the Angle Value field and the part rotates on the rotation axis. The Angle Value field continually updates the angle of rotation.
You can redefine this part's rotation axis. Click the Define Rotation Axis button Move/Rotate dialog box. Select a different connector, then set the angle of rotation as described above.
on the
Click OK to complete the task and close the Move/Rotate dialog box.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 158
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 159
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 160
If the object cannot have derived values, the Derived checkboxes will not display. If a Derived checkbox is selected, it means the value is derived. If it is not checked the values are not derived. A value is considered to be derived when it is obtained from another object. For instance, a piping route may derive the values of some properties from the line of which it is a member. The Properties dialog box displays several tabs: G The Graphic tab allows you to change the looks.
G
The Object tab displays information about the object such as ID, Function Class, Parent Group or Group Members, depending on the object being queried. Under the Product tab you can make changes to the basic Product in the specifications tree, such as renaming. You can include additional descriptive and historical data. One or more application tab - such as Piping or Equipment - lists various properties. They will display depending on the class of object whose properties you are editing. Click the More button if one of these tabs does not display, or if you want to see other tabs. More than one tab may display for some objects, such as Piping and Equipment, if the object has properties in more than one domain. The filter button lets you use the filter function. See Filter the Properties of an Object.
See Infrastructure documentation (Basic Tasks - Manipulating Objects - Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties) and Product Structure documentation (User's Tasks - Modifying Component Properties) for more information. 3. Enter values in the fields as desired and click OK. The properties will be edited. 4. You can override derived values by modifying the values as outlined in Step 3. The Derived checkbox will become unchecked. You can also override derived values by unchecking the Derived checkbox. To revert to derived values check the Derived checkbox. 5. Click OK to end. Some objects have discrete values - which means you may only select certain values. In that case you will be able to display a drop-down box and select one of the values in it.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 161
3.
Save the file in a directory of your choice. Modify the project resource management file to reflect the directory in which the file is located. To do this, change the entry for the resource "Attribute Display List". See PRM documentation for more information. The display order will apply to subclasses also, unless a subclass has its own display order text file.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 162
2.
An X in the column Show means the attribute is displayed in the Properties dialog box. An X in the column Computed means the attribute is computed. If you check the checkbox Show Only Attributes with Value, then only attributes that have a value will display in the Properties dialog box. Click on each property to toggle between Display and Hide. An X next to a property means it is displayed. The settings will be retained when you open the Properties dialog box again.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 163
Renaming Objects
This task shows you how to rename objects. 1. . The Rename dialog box displays. In the view below you can With your document open, select the object and click the Rename button see that the ID field is displaying the name assigned by the application; in this case, P-004, indicating that this is the fourth instance of a pipe being placed in this document.
2. If you wish to rename the object (or instance) enter the new name in the ID field. To revert to the Default ID click on the Set to default button.
3. If you want to rename additional objects click Apply and continue renaming. 4. Click OK when finished. The objects will be renamed.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 164
Using this command to rename a object does not rename all instances of that object. If you have placed an object more than once in a document and want to rename all of them, you will have to rename each one, individually.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 165
1.
. The Resize/Respec window opens. (The With your document open click the Resize/Respec Part button Reset/Resize/Respec buttons become available after you make a selection.)
2. To change the size or specification of parts in a network, click the Select elements in range button. The Analyze Networks dialog box displays. Click the Path tab and set the From Object and To Object.
When Current Path and Number of objects in current path accurately reflect the range you want to select, click Close. The Resize/Respec dialog box opens. Click Resize to open the Resize Parts dialog box, explained in the next step. 3.
Nominal Size: This field displays the size of parts in your selection. If there is more than one size in your selection then more than one size displays, as in the image above. If one part has more than one size (a reducer) and you have checked the option List Multiple Sized Parts in the Resize/Respec dialog box, then the display will be as shown below, to allow for more flexibility in selection.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 166
The asterisks after the value will be replaced by a value once you make your selection in the To field. For a rectangular object you will get height and width fields. See HVAC Design documentation. You can highlight your selection change, or reframe it, using the buttons. If the Resize Run and Validate Turns (checks for turn radius errors) options are grayed out, it is because these operations are not relevant - there is no run selected. Move your pointer over a part to see values for various properties. Make your changes and click OK, to open the Define Part Options dialog box. 4. The Define Part Options dialog box allows you to select a part when you have more than one selectable part.
The first line shows an error - you will not be able to resize the nozzle. The asterisk in the first column means you have more than one selectable option for this part. The Options field appears when you select a part. Click on the down arrow to display your options, shown above.
Make your selection and click OK. The selected parts will be resized. 5. To change the specification, click the Respec button after making your selection (Step 2). The Respec Parts dialog box opens, allowing you to change/add the specification. The From and To fields display after you select a specification. In HVAC Design the column headings are different. See HVAC Design documentation.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 167
6. , and select To change the size or spec of all members of a line ID in the active document click the Select Line button the Line ID in the Selection List that displays. Click OK and the Resize/Respec dialog box will open. Make changes as necessary. 7. ; select the spool in the To change the size or specification of members of a Spool, click the Select Spool button Selection List that displays, and click OK. With the Resize/Respec dialog box open, proceed as above, making the desired changes. 8. To change the size or spec of a single part select it in the document or from the specification tree and click the Resize/Respec button. The Resize/Respec dialog box will open. Select the Resize or Respec button and make your changes.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 168
From the part itself. A run. A connector. Based on a specifications catalog. A line. From a 2-D function (in the case of schematic driven design only). Defined by the user. If a value has been assigned to an attribute during part build time, then that value will be used when the part is placed. Examples of attributes whose values are defined in the part are: material category, material code, part numbers. If a part is placed on a run: A bendable part will pick up the bend radius and the nominal size values from the run. Other parts will pick up the nominal size value only. If you select a connector before placing a part then the values will be derived from the connector. The image below shows a connector with attributes and values displayed.
1. 2.
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 169
If the valve shown above had already been placed on a run, and you selected the run before placing a new part, then that new part would have derived values from the run. In the HVAC Design application, if you select a connector to place a new part, then the values will actually be assigned to the new part. In other applications you will be provided with a part that matches the nominal size and other attribute values. Some of the attributes typically defined on a connector are those displayed above: wall thickness, rating, end style and nominal size. If you are selecting parts from a specifications catalog: If the part being placed does not have an attribute value defined, then the value will be obtained from the specification. If the value is defined in both the specification and on the part then the value on the part will remain unchanged. When you are placing a part as part of a line: If the part does not have an attribute value defined, then the value will be obtained from the line. If the value is defined on both the line and the part then the value on the part will remain unchanged. Attributes that are typically defined on the line are: insulation specification, insulation thickness, temperature and pressure. In schematic driven design: If the value is not defined on the physical part then it will be obtained from the function. If the value is defined on the the function and the physical part then the value on the physical part will remain unchanged. User defined: During part build time some attributes can be defined as override parameters, which means the user defines the value. For such attributes, users will be prompted to define values at parts placement time. The application attempts to determine values in the order given above - if the part itself does not have a value it will examine the line, then the run and so on.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 170
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 171
Placing Parts
This task shows you how to place a part on a run. This function allows you to filter (or search) a catalog for parts that meet the criteria that you specify. You are presented with a list of parts that meet these criteria so that you can select the part that you want to place. The same procedure is used for placing parts at a location other than a run. Also, while piping parts are used in this example, the procedure is the same for other types of parts. See also Detecting Clash in Parts Placement and Placing Parts Using a Schematic. Note that this application incorporates intelligent design functions. This means that the application ensures your design meets a selection of criteria. These criteria are established by Design Rules. For instance, the design rules will match the threaded end of a pipe to the threaded end of a part. (You can override the rules if necessary.) There are certain general design rules that apply to all parts you place. Other rules apply to parts you place from a specifications catalog or a standard. Theoretically you can create a new standard and not incorporate any design rules. However, your parts will not place correctly if you do so. A set of sample design rules is included with this application. But most users (administrators, not individual users) will create or add to these. See Rules Overview to find out which rules affect parts placement. The standard and specifications catalog that you use for parts placement is defined in the setup data. See Understanding Project Resource Management. 1. With the run displayed, click on the Place Piping Part button . The Place Piping Part dialog box displays. (In the image below the user has already made some selections.)
The first row of buttons provides you with placement options. This can aid you in selecting a placement location in a busy document. Move the cursor over the button to see its name.
G
Select or Indicate: This is the default selection and allows you to select or indicate a placement location. Select Run Only: You can only select a run. Select Connector Only: Allows you to select a part connector only. First select a part - all connectors display - then select the connector.
Piping Design
G
Version 5 Release 16
Page 172
Indicate On Local XY Plane: You can select a location that is on the XY plane of the local axis of the document. Indicate on Compass Plane: You can select a location that is on the compass plane. If the compass is inactive then the local plane will be used. Select Surface: Select a surface and then select a location. Use Compass Z for Placement Up Orientation: The part will align itself with the compass Z direction, and not the default 'up' direction of the part. In the image below the valve on the left shows the default up direction, the valve on the right aligns to the compass Z direction.
2. Select a location for the part - you have to do this before you can display the Class Browser. See below if you want to multi-place parts. You may want to place the same part in more than one location - for instance you have a run with several bends and you want to place an elbow at each bend. You can multi-place parts in one of two ways. Before you select a location (Step 3) click the Multi-Place Parts button. Or do a Shift-Click when you select the location. Now when you select a part it will be placed at all compatible locations. This works with elbows and pipes. The multi-place function applies to one run. If your run is broken, and you use the multi-place function, it will apply to a single run. If the Break Run at every placed part option is checked then the multi-place function may not work. To check or uncheck the option go to Tools - Options - Equipment and Systems and select/unselect the Design Criteria tab. 3. If the Clear Filter button is enabled it means that values from a previous part placement exist in the Filter Definition dialog box. (See Step 5.) Click the button if you want to clear these values. 4. If you want to change the values of one or more properties of the part you want to filter for, then click the Filter Definition button to display the Filter Definition dialog box. Select the property whose value you want to change and then select the new value from the drop down box in the Value field. (The Value field will display after you select a property.) This new value will appear in the Override value column. The values in the Override value column will be used when searching for parts in the catalog.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 173
The Override button brings up the Manage Override Parameters dialog box, allowing you to change attribute values. The Flip Part button allows you to flip parts that can be flipped, such as a reducer. The Move/Rotate button displays the Move/Rotate dialog box, allowing you to manipulate the part. The Pipe Selection and Pipe Segment Shortcut buttons are shortcuts that let you select part type. Click the Spec Driven button if you want part placement to be specifications driven. The Change to Schematic Mode button lets you toggle between schematic and non-schematic mode. You will exit the command when you click this button and need to click the Place Part command again.
5. Click the Class Browser button to display the Class Browser. Double click on Piping Part Function to expand the list.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 174
6. Select a function and click OK. The function will display in the Place Piping Part dialog box. 7. In the Place Piping Part dialog box, click on the down arrow in the Part Type field to display a list of part types (if there is more than one) and select the part type you want. If there is only one part type it will be preselected. If the Part Type field is grayed out then click again on the location where you want to place the part. 8. The Part Selection box will display after you select a part type - if there is more than one selection. It will not display if there is only one selection available to you.
If the part you want to place can be created as a light object, you will be able to differentiate between heavy and light sample parts. Heavy parts are identified by the letters HV in the part name. Light parts do not have any designation.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 175
9. Select the part you want to place and click where you want to place it. The part will be placed. In the image below it is a straight pipe. If there is only one selection available to you then click after Step 6.
To ensure correct placement of pipes in a run you should first place all the in-line components and then place the pipes. You can choose to display or hide a "preview" of the part you are placing. To do this click on Tools Options and select Equipment & Systems and the General tab. Check or uncheck the box Display image while placing catalog object in 3D viewer to obtain the effect you want. By default, when you click (in free space) to place a part the center of that part will be placed at that location. The center is determined by the application by drawing a box around the part and selecting the center of the base of the box. You can also choose to place the origin of the part at the point where you click. To do this click on Tools - Options and select Equipment & Systems and the General tab. Check the box Place at component's origin when placing in free space.
After you move or modify a run or part, click the Update Part button and select a part to update that part, or select the run to update the run. You only need to do this if the application does not update the object.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 176
2. Move the pointer to the highlight the compass for the desired direction of rotation.
3. At this point there are two methods of rotating the part. If you know the exact amount of rotation required, double click on the highlighted arc (visible in Step 2). The Compass Manipulation dialog box opens. Enter the exact amount of rotation in the desired axis; in this case the Y axis. Click Apply new position and then Close.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 177
The alternate method is to grab the compass and rotate the part to the desired degree of rotation.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 178
Flipping a Part
This task shows you how to flip a piping part. "Flipping" here means connecting the part by using a different connector than the one currently used. 1. Click on the Flip Part Position button and then click on the part you want to flip. You can repeat this step to keep trying out all the connectors on the part. In the image below, the tee has three connectors. This step has been used twice to try out all the connectors.
Some parts cannot be flipped. In such cases you will get an error message.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 179
Inserting a Part
This task shows you how to insert a part. This procedure is used for inserting a part, such as a tee, at a location on a pipe, for instance. This effectively splits the pipe into two parts. 1.
. The Place Piping Part dialog box With the run displayed, click the Place Piping Part button displays. Click the Class Browser button and navigate to the type of part you want to place. See Placing a Part on a Run.
2.
Select the part you want to place and click where you want to place it. The part will be placed. In the image below a tee has been inserted in a straight pipe.
3.
To learn about adjusting the location of the part once it is placed, see Move/Rotate In-Line Parts.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 180
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 181
2.
Click the Insulate button and the Add New Insulation dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 182
3.
Select the parts in your document for which you want to add insulation. The part names display in the Parts to Insulate pane. Click the Show Insulation Parts button insulation parts. and the Catalog Browser displays with the available
Double-click on the insulation part you want to add. The Add New Insulation dialog box redisplays with the selected insulation part displaying in the top pane.
Repeat this process for each insulation part you want to add.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 183
Click Add when you are done. The Insulation Management dialog box redisplays. The insulation parts you selected display in the Insulation pane. Notice that the parts you selected are highlighted in your document and in the specifications tree. The selected insulation parts listed in the Insulation pane now are added to these parts. Click Close to close the dialog box. You can add insulation parts from base parts in your document that already have insulation parts defined. Click the Insulation Management button. Select a part with insulation parts defined. The insulation parts display in the Insulation pane in the Insulation Management dialog box. From the Insulation pane, select the insulation parts you want to add to other parts, and click the Insulate button. The Add New Insulation dialog box displays. Select other parts in your document. The selected parts display in the Parts to Insulate pane. Click Add. The parts you selected are highlighted in your document and in the specifications tree. The insulation parts listed in the Insulation pane now are associated with these parts. Click Close to close the dialog box. You can query parts to determine those with insulation parts defined. Click the Insulation Management button. Select a part and a list of insulation parts added to this part displays in the Insulation pane in the Insulation Management dialog box. You can repeat this procedure for each part. You can query insulation parts to determine the base parts to which each was added. Click the Insulation Management button. In the Insulation Management dialog box, click the List All Insulation Parts for All Base Parts button . A list of insulation parts displays in the Insulation pane.
4.
5.
6.
Notice that all parts that have insulation parts defined are highlighted in your document and in the specifications tree. Select an insulation part from the list and click Insulate. In the Add New Insulation dialog box, the top pane lists the selected insulation part, and the Parts to Insulate pane lists all the parts that have this insulation part defined. You can use the dialog boxes described above to manage the insulation parts.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 184
7.
You can alphanumerically sort a list of insulation parts or other parts in your document. G To alphanumerically sort a list of insulation parts displayed in the Insulation pane in the Insulation Management dialog box, click the appropriate sort button alongside Sort Options.
G
To alphanumerically sort a list of the parts displayed in the Add New Insulation dialog box, click the appropriate sort button alongside Sort Options.
8.
You can delete insulation parts from the part that has the insulation defined. Click the Insulation Management button and select the part in your document. Select one or more insulation parts from the list in the Insulation pane in the Insulation Management dialog box. Click Delete and the insulation parts are deleted from the base part. You can remove insulation parts from the list in the top pane in the Add New Insulation dialog box. (This just removes the part from the list. The insulation part is still associated with the base part.)
9.
Select insulation parts from the top pane in the Add New Insulation dialog box, and click Remove. 10. You can remove base parts from the Parts to Insulate pane in the Add New Insulation dialog box. (Removing the base parts from the list in the Parts to Insulate does not affect the base parts in your document.) Select the base parts to remove from the list in the Parts to Insulate pane, and click Remove. You can remove all base parts on the list by clicking Remove All. 11. You can display and modify properties of insulation parts listed in the Insulation pane in the Insulation Management dialog box. Select an insulation part from the list and click Properties. The Properties dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 185
Objects that transition a change in shape (e.g., round duct to rectangular) Objects that transition a change in alignment (e.g., twisted section)
Transitional part types are reducers, transitions, and twisting parts. When placed on a run, these transitional objects split the run. In the following scenario we will use the Piping Design application to illustrate this function. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Create a simple run and click the Place Part button . The Place Part dialog box opens.
opposite the Function type field. The Class Select the run, then click the Browser button Browser opens. Expand Piping Part Function and select Reducer Function. Under Part Type, select Eccentric Reducer. In the Part Selection dialog box, select a Part Number that is appropriate for the size of the run. For example, if you created a 2 in. run, select REDECC-WM-BW-2in-1in.
6.
Place the part and notice that now there are two runs of different sizes. In the specifications tree, note that in addition to the Reducer Function and Reducer, there is also a second Run.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 186
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 187
2. To turn clash detection on click the Clash Detection (On) button . When you move a part in such a way that it interferes with another part, a red outline will display, as in the images below. (If your part displays red highlights and you want to change the color you can do so by clicking ToolsOptions-Display and selecting another color.)
3. . When this mode is on To change to the stop mode click the Clash Detection (Stop) button you will not be able to move a part to a position in which it interferes with another part. In the first image below the pump has been stopped because it interferes with the heat exchanger. However, when the user moves his pointer to the other side, and there is enough room for the pump, the pump will appear on the other side of the exchanger.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 188
The window displays all graphic representation categories in the document, even if the part type is from a different application, e.g. if you open the document in a piping application, you will also see categories for tubing parts and equipment.
2.
Select one of the Range options. G Single object: You can select a single part or run. Runs can be displayed as single or double.
G
Selection: Select the parts in your document first, by clicking on them, and then click the Manage Graphic Representations button. You can now change the category of all the parts you selected. All: You can change the category of all parts in your document. All runs: You can change the category of all runs in your document.
The options under the Mode section allow you to replace or add a representation. Except for runs and light objects, other objects can have more than one representation active at the same time. If you check Add and continue to Step 3, the representation will be added to the visible representation (for example, single and double will display at the same time). If you check Replace, the visible representation will be replaced by the representation you select.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 189
3.
Change the graphic representation that is active by selecting a different category in the window. Based on what you selected under Range, one object, more than one selected objects or all objects in your document will change to the newly selected category. The images below show a valve as double, and envelope.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 190
2.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 191
2.
If you check the option Highlight current elements then the auto parts that display in the dialog box window will be highlighted in the 3D viewer.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 192
3.
Choose one of the Selection Options. G Single part: Select a part and this option. All auto parts associated to the part will display in the dialog box window.
G
Single Run: Select a run and this option. All auto parts in the run will display in the dialog box window. Selection: First make your selection in the document, then click the Query Auto Parts button to open this dialog box, and select this option. Line ID: Select a line ID and this option. All auto parts in the line ID will display in the dialog box window. Active Parent: Select the active parent of the part/parts and this option.
Once you make your selection the auto parts will display in the window.
4.
To convert auto parts, click the Convert button. The action will apply to all auto parts displayed in the Query Auto Parts dialog box. A second dialog box will ask you to confirm the action. Click OK to convert the parts.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 193
2.
Click the Add button and the Add New Loose Part dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 194
3.
Select the base parts in your document to which you want to associate the loose parts. The base parts you select display in the Parts List pane. Click the Show Loose Parts button loose parts. and the Catalog Browser displays with the available
Double-click on the loose part you want to associate with the base parts. The Add New Loose Part dialog box redisplays with the selected loose part displaying in the Loose Parts List pane.
Repeat this process for each loose part you want to associate with the selected base parts. Click OK when you are done. The Loose Parts Management dialog box redisplays. The loose parts you selected display in the Loose Parts pane.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 195
Notice that the base parts you selected are highlighted in your document and in the specifications tree. The loose parts listed in the Loose Parts pane now are associated with these base parts. Click Close to close the dialog box. You can add loose parts from base parts in your document that have loose parts defined. Click the Loose Parts Management button. Select a base part with loose parts already defined. The loose parts associated with the selected base part display in the Loose Parts pane in the Loose Parts Management dialog box. From the Loose Parts pane, select the loose parts the you want to associate to other base parts, and click the Add button. The Add New Loose Part dialog box displays. Select other base parts in your document. The selected base parts display in the Parts List pane. Click OK. The base parts you selected are highlighted in your document and in the specifications tree. The loose parts listed in the Loose Parts pane now are associated with these base parts. Click Close to close the dialog box. You can query base parts to determine those with loose parts defined. Click the Loose Parts Management button. Select a base part and a list of loose parts associated with this base part displays in the Loose Parts pane in the Loose Parts Management dialog box. You can repeat this procedure for each base part. You can query loose parts to determine the specific base parts to which each is associated. Click the Loose Parts Management button. In the Loose Parts Management dialog box, click the List All Loose Parts for All Base Parts button . A list of loose parts displays in the Loose Parts pane.
4.
5.
6.
Notice that all base parts that have loose parts defined are highlighted in your document and in the specifications tree. Select a loose part from the list and click Add. In the Add New Loose Part dialog box, the Loose Parts List pane lists the selected loose part, and the Parts List pane lists all the base parts that have this loose part defined. You use the dialog boxes described above to manage the loose parts.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 196
7.
You can alphanumerically sort a list of loose parts or base parts. G To alphanumerically sort a list of loose parts displayed in the Loose Parts pane in the Loose Parts Management dialog box, click the appropriate sort button alongside Sort Options.
G
To alphanumerically sort a list of base parts displayed in the Add New Loose Part dialog box, click the appropriate sort button alongside Sort Options.
8.
You can delete loose parts from the base part to which they are associated. Click the Loose Parts Management button and select the base part. Select one or more loose parts from the list in the Loose Parts pane in the Loose Parts Management dialog box. Click Delete and the loose part is no longer associated to the base part. You can remove loose parts from the Loose Parts List in the Add New Loose Part dialog box. (This just removes the part from the list. The loose part is still associated with the base part.)
9.
Select the loose part from the Loose Parts List pane in the Add New Loose Part dialog box, and click Remove. 10. You can remove base parts from the Parts List in the Add New Loose Part dialog box. (Removing the base parts from the Parts List does not affect the base parts in your document.) Select the base parts to remove from the Parts List, and click Remove. You can remove all base parts on the list by clicking Remove All. 11. You can display and modify properties of loose parts listed in the Loose Parts pane in the Loose Parts Management dialog box. Select a loose part from the list and click Properties. The Properties dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 197
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 198
2.
The changed color shows that a connection has been established between the access plate and the duct. The Position Placed Part dialog box displays after you place the access plate. This allows you to position the access plate and also make changes to its properties. See Adjusting an Access Plate for an explanation of this dialog box.
3.
Make your adjustments and click Apply or OK. You exit the command when you click OK.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 199
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 200
. You can use it to move the access plate to another surface placement tool displays click the location. If you do not want to move the plate to another surface then click the surface it is on. The Position Placed Part dialog box displays after you have repositioned the access plate or selected the same surface.
2.
The tabs Flat and Round refer to the duct - rectangular or round - on which you have placed the access plate and will be preselected. If not preselected, select Flat or Round, depending on the surface the access part is on. The Offset Distance field allows you to define the distance you want the plate from a selected edge. Select an edge and the access plate. The distance between the two displays in the Offset
3.
Distance field and there is visual indication on the part. and Down arrows. The access plate is repositioned.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 201
4.
The Depth Distance field displays distance, depending on the mode you select. Clicking the button next to the field toggles you three modes. Distance form the top of the access part to the centerline of the duct. You can enter a different value to raise or lower the access part. In the image below the part has been raised, to show you the effect.
You can position the part just beneath the surface of the duct. In this case the Depth Distance field displays the thickness of the duct surface. You can enter a value to raise or lower the part.
You can position the part level with the surface of the duct. In this case the Depth Distance field displays 0 distance. You can enter a different value to raise or lower the part.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 202
5.
Click the Round tab if the access part is on a curved surface - a round duct for instance. Radial: Select this option and change the value in the Angle field to reposition the part along the circumference of the duct.
Normal: Select this option and change the value in the Horizontal Offset field to move the part horizontally. The part will not 'rotate' around the duct - it will only move horizontally. This also means that in order to retain contact with the duct a portion of the part will 'sink' into the duct as it is moved.
6.
The Edit Parts Parameters and Snap Object on a Surface buttons are standard commands. See Changing the Parameters of a Part and Quick Snap Resources. Click OK to save your document.
7.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 203
2.
The Edge with Edge option, together with the Parallel Edges button, allows you to parallel a part with a given edge. In the image below the access plate is not parallel to the duct.
Select the Edge with Edge option, select an edge of the duct and then select an edge of the access plate (you may need to zoom in on the plate to be able to select).
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 204
3.
The Branch option lets you change the angle of a branch. Select the option and enter a value in the Angle field to change the angle of a branch.
4.
The Compass-Z option allows you to rotate a part about the Z axis. Select the option and enter a value in the Angle field to rotate the part.
5.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 205
the following spatial objects from Plant Layout, Systems Space Reservations, and Systems Routing: boundary, pathway, box, run, spatial loft, loft section, and area. the following non-spatial objects: piping part, HVAC part, equipment, nozzle, tubing part, conduit part, support part, raceway part, waveguide part, access part, and weld.
Updating Compartment Membership Resolving Membership Conflicts Querying Compartment Membership Locking Compartment Membership
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 206
To update compartment membership for one object (for example, if you moved this object from one compartment to another), select that object.
The Update Compartment Membership Results dialog box displays (the following diagram shows the results of updating compartment membership for an entire document):
For each object listed, you can scan through the Old Compartments and New Compartments columns to confirm that it is correct. If you have moved any objects from one compartment to another, that should be reflected in these columns. These listing display under the Membership OK tab because the command found no ambiguities or conflicts. Conflicts and what you can do about them are described in Resolving Compartment Membership Conflicts. 3. (Optional): Select the Reframe on Selection checkbox so you can automatically zoom in on any object you select in the Object Name column. 4. Do one of the following: G Click OK to accept the updated compartment memberships for all objects.
G
Click Cancel to to keep the old compartment membership for each object.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 207
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 208
The diagram above shows an example where Cmpt-036 was not loaded into the document, so it is unclear whether the objects previously in that compartment are still there or if they have been moved to a different compartment. 1. To resolve the conflict, select one of the objects for which there is a membership conflict. In the case of Elbow-017, the following message displays:
You still have Elbow-017 in Cmpt-36, but you did not load Cmpt-036 into the document before running the Update Compartment Membership command. You have moved Elbow-017 into another compartment (Cmpt-40, for example), but you did not load Cmpt-40 before running the Update Compartment Membership command.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 209
2. Do one of the following: G To keep Elbow-017 in Cmpt-36, review the Membership to Set column and confirm that Old is listed for that object. If New is listed, click on it to toggle it to Old.
G
To confirm a new location for Elbow-017, view the Membership to Set column for that part, and toggle it to New.
For each object listed, you can confirm its membership as described above. 3. If you know that all of the objects listed should be in their old or new compartment, click the All Old or All New buttons respectively. 4. Click OK to accept the updated compartment memberships.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 210
The Select/Query Compartments dialog box displays a list of the compartments in your document:
2.
3.
(Optional) To filter the range of compartments displayed in the list, use the wildcard character (*) and key in the first or last few alpha-numeric characters of a compartment ID in the ID Filter String text box. Do one of the following: G Click Compartment and select a compartment in the list. The compartment is highlighted in your document and in the specification tree.
G
Click Compartment Members and select a compartment in the list. The members of that compartment are highlighted in your document and in the specification tree.
4. 5.
(Optional) Click Reframe On Selection to automatically zoom in on the compartment or its members upon selection in the list. (Optional) Click Properties to view the properties of the selected object or objects.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 211
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 212
3. 4.
Click the Lock checkbox to lock the equipment or object listed to the compartment shown in the Memberships text box. Key in a different compartment if you want to override the compartment listed in the Memberships text box.
5. Click OK to confirm the locked membership. The next time you run the Update Compartment Membership command, a Membership Locked tab displays in the Update Compartment Membership Results dialog box:
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 213
6.
To unlock compartment membership for an object, repeat the first two steps, click the Lock checkbox to deactivate it, and click OK to confirm the unlock.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 214
Flow Direction
This section discusses management of flow direction. Display Flow Direction Changing Flow Direction
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 215
This task shows you how to display the flow direction. 1. With your document open, click the Manage Flows button . The Manage Flows dialog box displays.
2. Click one of the buttons in the Manage Flows dialog box to set the selection mode. You can set the flow for: G Selected elements in a range.
G
A spool (if defined). A line ID. . The Analyze Networks dialog box displays.
Select the first and last objects in the range to display its flow. Make sure you select the part, not just the run. The objects you select display in the Analyze Networks box in the From Object and To Object fields.
Piping Design
4. Click Close in the Analyze Networks dialog box.
Version 5 Release 16
Page 216
You see the flow direction display in your document. The Flow Options dialog box also displays.
You use the Flow Options dialog box to change flow direction as explained in Changing the Flow Direction. 5. To display the flow direction of a spool, click the Select Spools... button all the spools. . The Selection List dialog box displays with a list of
6. Select a spool and click OK. The flow direction displays on the spool you selected, and the Flow Options dialog box displays. 7. To see the flow direction of all members of a line ID, click the Select Line ID... button displays with a list of line IDs. Select the line ID and click OK. . The Selection List dialog box
The flow direction displays on all members of the line ID, and the Flow Options dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 217
2. Click one of the flow direction arrows so that it points in the direction you want. In the image below, the flow direction of the last arrow changes.
3. Click the Follow Flow of Selected Element checkbox in the Flow Options dialog box and then click the flow direction arrow again. All parts connected to it (in the range that you selected) will change flow direction to the same direction as the selected arrow.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 218
The flow direction will not change in a tee, or beyond a tee, even though it is connected and within your selected range. If the flow capability was defined when a part was built, you will not be able to change its flow direction using this command.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 219
Managing Spools
The following section explains ways of managing spools in a piping line. Creating a Spool Display and Edit Properties of a Spool Select/Query a Spool or its Members Transfer a Spool Add/Remove Members in a Spool Rename a Spool Delete a Spool
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 220
Creating a Spool
This task shows you how to create a spool. A spool is a grouping of objects much like an assembly is a group of components or parts. All objects in a spool must be contiguous and connected to each other. 1. In the following scenario a series of runs have been connected. Click on the Create Spool button . The Create Spool dialog box will appear.
2.
Click on the New button. A dialog box will appear prompting you to define the range (from-to) for the spool you want to create.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 221
To create a spool in a new document check the option Create Spool in a New Document and enter a file name in the window that displays. 3. Click the Define elements in range button . The Analyze Networks dialog box will open.
4.
Click on the Path tab and select the From and To objects of the spool you want to create. The image below shows the selected spool.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 222
5.
The spool is highlighted in the 3D viewer as are its members in the specification tree. The Analyze Networks dialog box displays the From object and To object as well as the Number of objects in the current path.
6. 7.
Click the Close button on the Analyze Networks dialog box. The New dialog box opens again allowing you to name the spool you just created. You may accept
the default name or assign a name of your choosing. Click on the Use ID Schema button to activate the Name field and enter the name for the spool. Click on the Use ID Schema button if you want to revert to the name assigned by the application. When finished, click OK. The spool is created. 8. You can click the Show all spools feature in the New dialog box shown in Step 2. All spools in your document will be highlighted. Click again on the Create Spool button to see the list of spools you have created.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 223
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 224
The Properties dialog box will display tabs, most of which are used in all products. The Graphic tab allows you to change the appearance of the object. Under the Product tab you can include additional descriptive and historical data and make changes, such as renaming, to the basic Product in the specifications tree. See Infrastructure documentation ( Basic Tasks - Manipulating Objects - Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties) and Product Structure documentation (User's Tasks - Modifying Component Properties) for more information. 2. Click the More button to reveal the Object tab and all other available tabs. In the image above the Object tab displays the members of the spool under Group Members. 3. Click on the Product tab to display properties and enter the values and information in the fields provided. 4. Click Apply or OK. The properties will be edited. Some objects have discrete values - which means you may only select certain values. In that case you will be able to display a drop-down box and select one of the values in it.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 225
With your product open, click on the Create Spool button . The Create Spools dialog box appears and displays the list of spools for the current product. Click on a spool among the list to reveal its location and to identify its members. You can also click on a part in the specifications tree to determine which spool it belongs to.
2. Use the Sort and Filter options if needed. 3. When you are finished, click Close.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 226
Transfer a Spool
This task shows you how to transfer a spool to another document. In the specifications tree, make active the document to which you want to transfer the spool, and 1. click the Create Spool button . The Create Spools dialog box appears and displays the list of spools for the current product. Select the spool you want to transfer and then click the Transfer button. The Transfer dialog box displays.
2.
3. 4.
Check one of the options - the first option will result in a new document being created under the active document, while the second option transfers the spool to the document you activated earlier. Click OK. The spool is transferred.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 227
2. The Modify dialog box displays. You can redefine, extend the range to add additional members, or remove members from the spool.
When modifying a spool, your options are limited to extending its range to include additional members or removing members. Remember that members may only be removed from the ends of a spool. The 'Remove members' feature will only let you remove members from the end of the spool.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 228
3. Click to activate the Show all spools option. This will highlight all spools in the your product.
4. To remove a member activate the Remove members option. Click on either the Keep all elements on first half button or the
depending on which end you want to remove members from. If you clicked on Keep all Keep all elements on second half button members on second half, you will remove members, one at a time, from the first half (end) of the spool. Click the Keep all members on first half button then click on the member you want to remove. All members from there to the end of the spool will be removed. In the view below, members have been removed from the second half of Spool_001.
5. To add members to a spool, activate the Add Members option. There are two ways to add members to a spool. G You can redefine the range of the spool by clicking the Define new range feature and click on the Define elements in range . The Analyze Network dialog box displays. Under the Path tab the range is undefined. Proceed in defining the range as button described in Creating a Spool. Select the beginning and end of the spool to include the new members.
The other method is to click the Append another range to current selection button . The Analyze Network dialog box displays. Proceed as has been described to define the new range of members you want to add to the current spool.
Piping Design
6. The new range of members are added to Spool_002.
Version 5 Release 16
Page 229
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 230
Renaming a Spool
This task shows you how to rename a spool. 1. Click on the Create Spool button to bring up the dialog box showing the list of spools in the current document. Select the spool you want to rename and click on the Modify button. The Modify dialog box will display.
2. 3. 4.
Enter the new name for the spool and press Enter. When finished click OK. The spool will be renamed. To revert to the default naming convention click on the Use ID Schema button .
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 231
Deleting a Spool
This task shows you how to delete a spool.
1.
2. 3.
Select the spool you want to delete and click the Delete button. When finished click Close. The spool will be deleted.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 232
Analyzing Networks
This section discusses ways in which you can analyze networks. Analyze Network for Connections Viewing Related Objects
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 233
2. Select the Network tab and then select the object whose connections you want to see. The entire network will highlight and the Analyze Networks box will display the number of objects there are in the network. In the image below the smaller run is not highlighted because it is not connected to the bigger run.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 234
3. To see all possible paths between two objects click the Path tab in the Analyze Networks box, then click the two objects. If there is a path between the two objects, it will highlight. If there are two or more possible paths, the Current Path field in the Analyze Networks box will display how many paths there are when you click on the down arrow. To see another path (if there is one) select it in the Current Path field.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 235
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 236
3.
You can also select one of the related objects shown in the Current Selection Panel to see which objects they are related to.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 237
4. 5.
If you check Reframe on selection and then click on one of the objects in the Current Selection Panel, the object will display in your screen even if it was not currently showing. Checking the Freeze box will freeze the contents of the Current Selection Panel and it will no longer be updated.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 238
Routing Tasks
This section explains some routing tasks that are in addition to the ones explained in the Basic Tasks section. Aligning a Run to an Existing Surface Routing in 3D with the Compass Routing at an Offset of a Routable Edgeline: Routing Parallel to a Run Route a Run along a Spline Fix broken routables
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 239
2. 3. 4. 5.
The Z axis of the compass (it may read W) assumes the angle of the edge against which it is held. At the same time the last segment of your run assumes the angle of the compass' Z axis. Click once at the end of the segment to move the compass back to it. You can repeat the action to make the run align with any other edge or surface in the area. Double click to end the run.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 240
1.
Click on the Route a Run button The Routing dialog box is displayed.
2. 3. 4.
Click on the Directional Routing button. Select the type of run and enter other values. See Routing a Run for more details. Click at the point where you want to start your run from. This places the compass at that point.
To begin routing click and drag the compass so that its Z axis (it may read W) is pointing in the direction in which you want to route. Every time you want to change direction drag the Z (or W) axis of the compass.
5.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 241
You can also double click on the compass to bring up the Compass Manipulation dialog box, which allows you to enter values to modify compass direction and/or location.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 242
This task shows you how to route a run at an offset of a routable. This function allows you to create a run paralleling an existing run, a defined distance apart. 1. Click the Create an Offset Route button. 2. Select a segment of the run to which you want an offset. The compass is placed on the segment. 3. The direction in which the Z axis of the compass is pointed determines where the new run will be placed: you can place the new run or runs to the inside, to the outside or stacked on top of the existing run by adjusting the compass. 4. Enter your options in the Run dialog box. 5. or Constant Clearance button. If you click the Constant Radius button the radius of the Click either the Constant Radius turns will be maintained but the offset may vary. If you click the Constant Clearance button the offset will be maintained but the radius of the turns may change. Click OK. The new runs will be created. A negative offset may be entered to offset in the opposite direction to the compass Z direction. In the illustration below the runs have been created with the Constant Clearance option.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 243
If you click the Offset button the distance between the two runs will be measured from centerline to centerline. If you click the Clearance button the distance between the two nearest edges will be measured. If there is a part on a piping or tubing line the distance will be measured from the part. If there is no part the distance will be measured from the line. 3. Enter the distance between the two runs. If you enter 0 and click the clearance button, the two runs will touch at the edges. 4. Click at the starting point. The compass will display at that point. 5. Move the compass so that the Z axis points in the direction that you want to route, which should be in the direction of the run that you want to parallel. You can do this by moving it manually, or by clicking the second mouse button once and then toggling the shift key.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 244
6.
Once you have the direction selected, route toward the run you want to parallel. Once the centerline of the target run is highlighted you can press the Shift key to toggle between various "solutions," or various sides. In the images below there are only two solutions and you can route on two sides of the target run.
7. 8.
Select the target run after you have decided which side you are routing on. Begin routing and double click to end. The finished run is shown below.
You can place an offset plane on a surface and use it as a reference to route parallel to, or to keep a certain clearance from. After placing the offset plane use the procedure described above.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 245
2. 3.
4. 5.
Click on the Route from Spline button. Select type of run and enter other options. Note: The SAG option is used to define the maximum distance a segment can be from the spline. The run that is created consists of straight segments, as you can see in the illustration below. The smaller the SAG number entered, the closer the run will resemble the spline. But this will also cause more segments to be created. Select Create connection to curve if you want a connection between the run and the spline. If this option is checked the run will move if the spline is moved. Click on the spline. The run is created.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 246
This task shows you how to fix - or rejoin - routables in which segments have become separated. In the illustration below, the dotted line - the broken routable indicator - shows that a run has become separated at that point.
You can re-join the run in one of several ways, depending on the nature of the break and your requirements. The methods are as follows: 1. Bring up the Definition dialog box for the run, then place the mouse pointer over the broken routable indicator and click the right mouse button. This will display a pop-up menu. Click Create Segment. 2. Bring up the Definition dialog box, then drag one of the segment handles to re-join the run.
3. Bring up the Definition dialog box. An arrow will display at each end of the broken (depending 247 on circumstances) to re-join the run. In the Version 5 Release 16 routable indicator. Drag one of the arrowsPage Piping Design illustration below, one segment of the run has been moved to connect to the portion of the run still connected to the pump.
4. In certain cases you will see the Auto Route option beneath the Create Segment option in the pop-up menu (See Step 1). This happens when a segment connecting two parallel routables (which are on different X-Y planes) is broken.
G
button. Options for re-joining the run will be shown as a dotted line.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 248
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 249
Creating a Part
This task shows how to create a part. The process explained here requires you to first build the graphic using Part Design. You do not assign a type to the part first. The advantage of using this method is that you can use the un-typed part again to create other types of parts. For instance, you can use the same graphic for a coupling and a union. It is recommended that you maintain separate directories for typed and un-typed parts. You should also create a graphic representations file and specify where it is located. (See Defining Directory Paths and Define Graphic Representations for a Part.) Light parts do not have a graphic to begin with, so you have to use a modified process to create light parts. The initial steps are explained in Creating a Light Part.
1. Build a graphic using Part Design and save it. 2. Click the Build Part button to display the Create Part dialog box.
3. to open the Set Object Type dialog box. Select the object type as Click the Set Object Type button explained in Defining the Part Type. Click OK in the Set Object Type dialog box. The part is assigned a type and displays in the specifications tree and the viewer. After selecting OK the Create Part dialog box displays again. You can now perform the other functions contained in this box, if needed. They are explained below. Note: All functions may not be available for light parts. 4. The File Open button is used to bring up a part, say, if you did not finish creating it and had to close the application. Clicking the File Open button opens a directory that is specified in the Project Resource Management file. You can also navigate to a different directory if you want to. You should only use this button to open a part that has already been typed. 5. The Define Properties button needed. brings up the Properties box, allowing you to change properties if
Piping Design
6.
Version 5 Release 16
Page 250
The Override Parameters button brings up a dialog box which allows you to override a parameter. When you click on a parameter on the left side of the box and then click on the arrow to bring it on the right side, that means the parameter can be overridden. (See Change the Parameters of a Part.) When you place this part the application will try to determine a value for that parameter. If it cannot, then you will be asked to enter one. For a stretchable part, such as a piping stretchable, the "Length" attribute must be defined as an override parameter.
7. Click the Design Table button to create a design table and associate it to the part you are creating. For more information on this see the Infrastructure document - Advanced Tasks - Using Knowledgeware Capabilities. 8. Click the Formula button to create formulas and parameters. See the Knowledgeware document mentioned above for more information. 9. The Define Connector button 10. The Connector Specs button 11. The Manage Representations button 12. Click the Define ID Schema button name for the part. next to the File Name field if you want the application to generate a lets you create and manage graphic representations. lets you associate attributes to connectors. allows you to add connectors.
13.You must save the part after you have made all your changes. Click Close or OK in the Create Part dialog box to exit he command. Select the part in the specifications tree, click File - Save as in the menubar and select a location for the part.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 251
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 252
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 253
2. Create your part (in this case an elbow) using Part Design. (See Part Design documentation if you need help.) You have now created the Double graphic representation of the part.
3. To create a second graphic representation, double click on Elbow1 (Elbow1.1) to return to Piping Design. 4. Click on the Build Piping Part button to display the Create Part dialog box and click on the elbow to make it active. The buttons in the Create Part dialog box will become active. 5. Click on the Manage Representations button box will display. . The Manage Graphic Representations dialog
If you are creating a light part then you will not have a graphic for it. Create a light part, or open a typed part, and click the Manage Graphics Representations button. The following dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 254
Click on the down arrow to select a name for each of the two representations. You can also select the default representation that you want displayed. 6. The Defined column shows which representations exist for the part. If a name has No against it you can create a representation by clicking on No. It will change to Yes and the graphic name will be added to the specifications tree. You now need to create a body for it, as described above. In the illustration below you can see both double and single representations. The single representation is the white line running through the 3D elbow.
7. If the value for a graphic in the Activated column is Yes it means you can see that graphic. (You can toggle between Yes and No by clicking on it.) If you check the box Expand representations you can see more than one representation of that part in the same document - if the representation exists.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 255
With the part displayed click on the Build Piping Part button box and then click on the Define Properties button
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 256
2. 3.
Click on the Piping tab to display properties and enter the values you want. Click Apply or OK.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 257
Select a part, in this case an elbow at the end of a run, and click the Edit Part Parameters button dialog box displays.
2. 3. 4.
The box displays parameters that can be overridden for the part you selected. In this case only the CutAngle can be overridden. Parameters that can be overridden are assigned to a part when you build a part of a specified type. When you select the parameter the current value appears in the = box next to Edit value of the current parameter. Enter the new value, for example 30deg, and click Apply. The cut angle of the elbow will be updated to 30 degrees.
5.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 258
2.
Click the Open Existing Part button next to the Filename field and navigate to the part you want to modify. Click Open on the File Selection dialog box. The file will display in the Filename field. Click the Display Class Browser button next to the Component Type field. The Class Browser will display. Expand the tree in the Class Browser and select the part type that you want to assign to the part. Click OK. The type will be assigned. Click OK in the Set Object Type dialog box.
3.
4.
5.
At this point a copy of the part is saved in the CATTemp directory under C:\..\..\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes. Proceed with the Build Part cycle, i.e., Define Properties, Formulas, associate a Design Table, manage Override Parameters, Define Connectors, Associate Specifications to the Connectors, and Manage Graphic Representations (as applicable).
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 259
6.
To save the part, activate the part level in your product, then click File - Save As.
Save the part in \..\..\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\PipingDesign\ ComponentCatalogs\Parametric. (Replace Piping\PipingDesign with the workbench you are in.)
7.
FOR EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT ONLY You can select the part in your document to bring up the Class Browser. This will only work if the part you select has not had a type assigned to it, such as when you are building the part. Also, note that when you use this method of assigning a type you will only be able to assign the Resource type. You will not be able to select any other type. To follow this procedure, click the Set Object Type button (in the Create Part dialog box or in the toolbar). The Set Object Type dialog box displays. Click the part to display the Class Browser and select the type. You can continue building the part.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 260
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 261
Open your document and select the Product under which it resides. 1. 2. Click the Build New Unique Reference button showing the unique parts in your document. . The List of Unique References dialog box displays,
3.
Select the part (you can select more than one) for which you want to make a new reference and click Apply and/or OK. The reference is created. The 'old' reference is deleted and replaced with the reference you just created. All existing connections and relations are maintained in the new reference. You need to save your changes.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 262
For Structures Applications Only: If you are using this task to resolve sections for structures applications like Structure Functional Design, you must add the following at the end of the command lines listed above: -appl Structure. This should be entered before you enter the two options explained above. So a command line would look: CATCloGenerateResolvedParts.bat XXX YYY -appl Structure -strip 3. After the program finishes executing, the parts are placed in YYY - the directory you created to hold the resolved parts. Each part has as its name the entry from the part number column of the design table. The design table association is removed from the generated resolved part. 4. Add the parts to a catalog. To add the parts to an existing catalog see Modifying a Catalog. To create a new catalog see Creating a Catalog. If a part does not get added to the catalog it may not have a part type (component object type) defined. In that case you may need to add the part to a catalog individually.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 263
Part Type: The part type to which the requirements apply. Geometrical requirements: The requirements you must incorporate when you are creating the geometry for the part. Properties: The requirements you must incorporate when defining these properties. Override parameters: The properties shown here must be defined as override. Connector type: The type of geometry needed for creating connectors.
Part Type
Properties
G
No requirements
HVAC:
G
Light object:
G
No geometry required
(stretchable)
Regular object: G PartBody named using the default representation name (i.e. "Double")
G
No requirements
New geometry
Profile sketch and Rib feature need to exist in the primary PartBody. PartBody named "Hidden" Spine sketch needs to exist in the "Hidden" OpenBody named "RibPath" which will be empty
HVAC:
G
Diameter
Bendable/Flexible
G
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 264
Light object:
G
HVAC:
G
Turn Angle:
G
Maximum angle that the elbow can turn No requirements Piping: G No requirements
G
No requirements
No requirements
Inline Weld
Light object:
G
Light object:
G
No geometry required
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 265
G
No requirements
Outside Diameter Outside Diameter2 Weld Offset Nominal Size Nominal Size2
Branch Weld
Light object:
G G
Light object:
G
No geometry required
New geometry
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 266
To explain the difference between light and heavy part: When you place a "heavy" part (refers to a parametric part that is not created as a light object) in your document, you end up creating a separate document for each unique reference. This is not the case when you place a resolved part - the placed part simply points to the catalog and a unique document is not necessary. The light object approach applies the concept of a resolved part to a unique reference. When you build a part as a light object you do not create the geometry of the part. Instead you build the part, designate it as a light object, as described the section Building Parts, and place it in a catalog. When you place the part in a document this application will automatically create the visualization for it. You should also note that differing lengths of a placed light object do not result in the creation of a separate document for each placement. As an example, when you first place a 10-inch pipe in a document, a separate document is created for that part. However, when you place a 10-inch pipe again in the same document - whatever the length - a separate document is not created. All instances of a 10-inch pipe will refer to the first document that was created. You cannot change an existing "heavy" part into a light object. It must be initially created as a light object.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 267
2.
The procedure for creating a light part is similar to that of creating a heavy part with one important difference. Since light parts do not have a graphic to begin with, you need to start by creating a type for the part. G Click the Build Part button to display the Create Part dialog box.
G
Click the Display Class Browser button next to the Component Type field. The Class Browser appears. The Class Browser allows you to select the type of part you want to create. Navigate to the type you want by clicking on the "plus" sign next to each directory, or by using the three navigation buttons at the bottom. You can also filter for certain types. For instance, you can enter "elbow" in the Filter field and select enter to see all elbow types. Click OK after making your selection. If you select a type in the class browser that can be created as a light part then the Create . The default Part dialog box will display a checkbox Make light object is checked. If you do not want to create a part as a light object then uncheck this.
Follow Step 5 onward in the task Creating a Part. Object naming rules FOR HVAC DUCTS
3.
If you want to place 'heavy' HVAC ducts then you need to change the file that defines the object naming rules. (You do not need to make any change if you are placing 'light' parts.) If you are placing heavy parts then navigate to the directory ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\HVAC\DataDictionary. The default files are named sch-CATHvaHVACXXXXDuct1.xml where XXXX represents a shape like FlatOval. Rename this file so that the application does not recognize it - you can add a SAVE at the end, for instance. You need to use the corresponding file that has the _HV at the end of the file name. This file is in the same directory, and normally directly beneath the file for light parts. To use this file simply remove the _HV. As an example:
G
Rename sch-CATHvaHVACXXXXDuct1.xml to schCATHvaHVACFlatOvalDuct1_SAVE.xml Remove the _HV from the file sch-CATHvaHVACFlatOvalDuct1_HV.xml
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 268
Using ENOVIA
The following information is provided as a brief understanding of the ENOVIA environment and what is needed to work with ENOVIA in conjunction with the CATIA Engineering and System suite of products. Please refer to ENOVIA documentation for more detailed information on specific ENOVIA usage and functionality. The ENOVIA, CATIA and DELMIA products based on Dassault Systemes' industry-renowned V5 enterprise architecture provide a complete solution for customer PLM requirements. The ENOVIA product line provides the PDM component of the overall solution. With the ENOVIA product, users can effectively manage the entire product life cycle of their data, including data management, work flow management, people and organization management, and many other aspects of their product and business. Creating a Product Importing a Product Using Work Packages Saving a Work Package Organizing Work Packages Also refer to the Customizing section.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 269
Creating a Product
This task explains how you should create a product. ENOVIA and CATIA should be running and connected.
. You should be in the ENOVIA home page You should familiarize yourself with the directory structure in ENOVIA. At the top level you will have a directory called product class root - this usually encompasses all the activity in your company. Under this you may have several product class directories. Under the product class will be the product directories. Product displays in this application, the other two are only displayed in ENOVIA. Users will mostly interact with the product. It is created at individual project level - in a shipyard it will be created for each ship that is designed - and work packages, explained later in this section, are created under the product. The product class directories may not be created in smaller projects, but the product class root and the product directories should always exist. 1. Information about creating all three levels is provided in ENOVIA documentation. Briefly, to create a product you should be in the Product Class View. Right click on the product class, select New and then Product in the menus that display. Enter a name for the product in the product ID field. Add to the Name and Description fields for informational purposes if you want. The newly created directory displays in the Product Class View.
2. Click the Save button to save your changes. A Characteristics window displays after you create a directory. You do not need to enter any information in it. Read the ENOVIA user guide to learn more about this window.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 270
Importing a Product
This task explains how you import a product, and work packages, from ENOVIA. You need to import the product because you will be creating work packages under it. The top level directories - product class root and product class - remain in ENOVIA, only the product is imported. You must import the product (and existing work packages) each time you start a new session. 1. In the Product Editor, right click on the product and select Send To - XXX, XXX being the application you are sending it to (such as CATIA V5). The product displays in the specifications tree.
2. You also need to import all the work packages that you need from ENOVIA to this application each time you start a new session. The process is as described above (select the document
associated with the work package and go to Step 2 above). Note that if you send a work package then the product is also sent - you do not need to send both. You can use filters to determine which work packages you need. It is best, though not essential, to import all the work packages that you need in one operation.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 271
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 272
2. ADD DOCUMENTS: However, in order to be able to route from the equipment, the piping engineer will need to be able to see the equipment. In order to do this the piping engineer will need to import the equipment document. See Importing a Product for more information. Once he has imported both documents he can make the piping document active and begin routing in it. When he saves, the piping information will be saved in the piping document. 3. PUBLISH CONNECTORS: As stated earlier, publications need to be created so that a connection can be established to objects in other work packages. To take the example given above, the piping engineer has both documents open, but he has write access only to the piping document, which he created. When he routes between the equipment publications are only created in his own document. Publications are needed so that the connections between components are retained. To ensure that publications are created even when someone without write access to a document connects equipment, connectors must be published. In this case the equipment engineer needs to publish the connectors on the equipment in his document so that when the piping engineer creates runs publications are created on the equipment also. In most cases this is done when the part is placed, because most parts do not exist in isolation and need to be connected to something. To learn how to create connectors and publish/unpublish them see Creating Connectors.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 273
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 274
Make entries in the Name and Description fields (for informational purposes) if you want to, and click Add or OK. The component you created displays under the Product.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 275
5.When you open the Product Editor again you will see three columns, with the first column showing the product and the newly created components, the second column showing the work packages and components, and the last column showing characteristics - if you select an object. If you do not see work packages in the second column then right-click on the product and select Open Assembly in Instance View.
6.To group one or more work packages under the component, right click on a work package and select Copy.
7.Next, right click on a component, and select Special Paste - Link. The work package will be grouped under that component.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 276
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 277
Create Connectors
This task shows you how to create a connector. Connectors can only be created on objects that have existing geometry that satisfies the rules of connector creation. If existing geometry is not present, you will have to create the geometry. 1. If the resource is not active, make it active by double-clicking in the specifications tree.
2.
Click the Build Connector button. This will bring up the Manage Connectors dialog box. You will not be able to add a connector on the instance of a standard part (a 'non-unique' part) using the Build Connector command. You need to use the Define Connectors sub-command in the Create Part dialog box. If you try to add a connector to a standard part using the Build Connector command then you will get an error message. The Build Connector command can be used to add connectors to a part that is unique - meaning it has one reference and one instance only. The Manage Connectors dialog box will list all connectors on the selected part. To see a connector and its associated geometry on the part, select a connector from the list. Adding a connector is explained below; Delete, Modify and Duplicate are explained elsewhere in this section. To Publish a connector means you are allowing people who do not have write access to your document to establish a connection. This is explained further in Using Work Packages. You can Publish or Unpublish connectors using the two buttons.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 278
3.
Click the Add button. The Add Connectors box displays. NOTE: The Define Connector Geometry options will not be available if you are placing a connector on a light object. For more information see Creating Connectors on Light Parts.
Select the type of connector - piping, HVAC, etc. In some applications the flow direction field will be available. The piping (or tubing) part connector has flow direction built in and you must select a flow direction also from the drop down menu. The mechanical part connector has no flow direction. Another type of connector - the nozzle connector - will be available if you are placing a connector on a nozzle. A nozzle connector must be placed on the end of the nozzle that connects to equipment. A part connector is placed on the end that connects to the pipe or duct. An electrical part connector should only be placed on a socket. The electrical part connector should be placed on the end of the socket that connects to equipment. A cableway part connector should be placed on the free end of the socket that does not connect to equipment. When you are placing a connector on a Bendable, such as a bendable pipe, you must use the Define New Geometry option. You must not use existing geometry to place the connector. You can name each connector by selecting in the Name field. This is useful for some functions, such as
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 279
designing using a schematic. See Customizing 2D and 3D Connector Names for more information. The concept of Publishing or Unpublishing a connector is explained above. Check the checkbox as necessary. Face, orientation and alignment are explained below. The orientation, alignment and face must be defined correctly before a connector can be created. To explain what these are, the face is the surface to which you attach a connector. As an example, if you want to attach a clock to your office wall, the wall is the face. You want the numeral "12" to be up, so you orient the clock accordingly. This is the orientation. The alignment is the direction in which the clock face is pointed - normally it would be perpendicular to the wall. When creating a connector, the alignment always has to be perpendicular to the face. The face is generally defined using a face of the part, such as the end of a pipe. Alignment is usually defined using a line, such as the not-shown line along the centerline of a pipe. Orientation is defined using the xy plane, or another plane or face to define an "up" direction. In the illustration below the Z axis indicates the alignment of the connector. It also indicates the direction in which routing will occur. The X and Y axis together define the orientation. They are useful when attaching two resources.
It is necessary to select geometry in the part to which you want to attach a connector so that these three characteristics are correctly defined. If the part does not have the necessary geometry then you must create it. 4. If you want to create a connector using the part's existing geometry click the Use existing geometry option.
Click the Select Face button to select a face. Selectable faces will highlight as you move your pointer over the part.
Click this button to select the alignment. You will only be able to indicate the alignment by selecting a line - from the construction geometry, or elsewhere in the part if there is one. You can
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 280
Click this button to select the orientation. You will only be able to select a plane that is perpendicular to the face you selected. If you cannot find a plane to select, click the Swap Visible Space button (see below) to make the construction geometry visible, and select a plane.
Some connector types require you to place a datum point. The datum point is placed by clicking this button and then clicking a 3-D point on the part. The datum point is used as follows:
G
Lofted reservation section: Datum is used to define where the spline will start and end when creating lofted reservations. Tubing & waveguide parts: Datum is used to define where the spline will start and end when creating flexible tubes. Hangers: See Hanger Design documentation.
You can display the part construction geometry, if there is any, to make it easier to select existing geometry. Do this by:
G
Right click on the part entry in the specifications tree. Click Hide/Show. The part will disappear from the screen.
Click the Swap Visible Space button . The part will reappear on your screen with the construction geometry visible. Clicking the button again will toggle you back.
5.
The fields under Classify Connector will become available after you have successfully selected the geometry explained in Step 4. Click on the down arrows to make your selection. Select a type. For Flow direction, select In, Out, InOut or None. Select the Face type. A Hole connection allows a routable to pass through it - it is useful for placing parts like clamps along a run without cutting a tube. A Face connection will stop a routable and not allow it to pass through. Select an alignment. Choose an orientation: Circular will allow the connector to attach to another connector at any orientation; round ducts and pipes, for instance, do not need a well-defined "up" direction because they can rotate. A Rectangular orientation is used for parts like rectangular ducts; they do not have a strict ''up" direction. Up allows the connector to attach to another connector or part in the up position: horizontal trays, for instance, require a well-defined "up" position. You can also use the "up" orientation for a hole connector. In the image below, the connector on the right has the up orientation, the connector on the left does not.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 281
6.
The number in the Number field is assigned by the application. This can be significant because when you are creating a new connector, you have the option of using the alignment and orientation used in the previous connector after you select the face. You can choose to do this, or select a new alignment and/or orientation. Click OK. The new connector will be listed in the Manage Connectors box. To define new geometry for placing a connector, select the option Define new geometry, then click on the Select plane button . The Define Plane box will display.
7.
8.
Use the functions provided by the Define Plane box to reposition the connector, if necessary, as explained below. (The colors of the buttons may be slightly different in some applications.)
face.
Click the Define Plane button to redefine the plane as well as the origin by clicking once on the
Click the Define Plane using Compass button to redefine the plane using the compass.
Click the Define 3-point Plane button to define the plane by clicking on any three points with your pointer. The connector will be placed on the first point you click.
Click the Define Line-Point Plane button to select the plane by clicking on a point and a line, like an edge. The connector will be placed on the first point you click.
Click the Define Line-Line button to select the plane by clicking on two lines. The plane will be defined by the first line selected. But if the two lines are parallel the plane will be defined as the plane in which both lines exist.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 282
Click the Define plane at center of circle button to select the plane by clicking three points on the edge of a circle. This method is used for multi-CAD documents, usually for CGR circles. You can click at points where two lines meet or in the center of a face. The Z axis of the plane manipulator will be placed according to the right hand rule. If you click clockwise the Z axis will point into the object. If you click counter clockwise the Z axis will point out from the object.
Click the Define plane at product origin button and then the object to place the plane manipulator on the origin of the object. The plane manipulator axis will match that of the product.
Click the Define Orientation button to change the orientation. Click the button and then click a point or a line. If you click a point the X axis will point to it. If you click a line the X axis will become parallel to the line.
Use the Move Origin buttons to define the plane. Define Origin at Plane or Compass allows you to define the origin using the compass or plane command. You use the compass or plane as the base plane along which the origin can be selected. Define Origin at Point or Center of Face lets you
9.
Define Origin at Center of Circle allows to select select the origin by clicking on a point or face. the origin by clicking at three points - the origin will be placed in the center of an imaginary circle drawn using those three points. The plane and orientation will not change when using this command. Click OK. The connector will be placed and the Add Connector dialog box will display again.<
10. Make your selections in the fields under Classify Connector as described in Step 5. Click OK.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 283
All options in the Define Connector Geometry area are grayed out because light parts cannot have the geometry needed to create connectors. 4. Make selections in the Classify Connector area, as explained in Step 5 of Create Connectors.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 284
5. When you are finished, click OK. The connector is created. You should note that connector geometry is not visible on light parts. Also, the location of the connector does not need to be specified - the connector only needs to be created on the part. The application will select the appropriate location for the connector when you are placing the light part.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 285
2. Select the part and click the Associate Attributes to Connector button Associate Attributes to Connectors dialog box. to display the
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 286
ATTRIBUTES: This section of the box displays all the attributes entered in the Connector Attributes file (see below). You will need to decide which ones you want to associate to specific connectors. The drop down arrow allows you to select how many of each attribute you want to be available to you nominal size and end style have two attributes each in this example. Click the down arrow and make your selection. Click Assign when you have finished. The second pane displays the connectors on your part and the attributes associated with them. In the example above, for instance, Connector 1 is associated with EndStyle, while Connector 2 is associated with EndStyle2. You can use the Edit - Properties function to edit the values assigned to these attributes. The third pane will display how many of each type of attribute are associated with the part, and the values, if any, assigned to them. You can also use it to change the attribute assigned to each connector. To display the attributes, select one of the attributes in the second pane, say EndStyle. The window displays all the available end styles on the part and their values.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 287
To change the attribute associated with a connector: Click on the attribute beneath the connector in the second pane. Then, in the third pane, select the attribute you want to replace it with. In the example above, for Connector 1, if you want to change EndStyle to EndStyle2, select EndStyle in the second pane and EndStyle2 in the third pane. Click OK when you have finished.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 288
CONNECTOR ATTRIBUTES FILE The Connector Attributes file controls the attributes that are displayed in the Associate Attributes to Connectors dialog box. A part may have dozens or even hundreds of attributes associated with it. Since only some of these need to be associated with connectors, the Connector Attributes file gives you a way of controlling the number. There are sample ConnectorAttributes.txt files for each application, located in the directory ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\XXX\ YYY\ComponentCatalogs where XXX is the discipline, like Piping, and YYY is the application, like Piping Design. Sample files for Equipment Arrangement are located a little differently: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Equipment\XXX\ EquipmentArrangement\ComponentCatalogs where XXX is a discipline like Piping. This simply allows for placing different types of equipment (piping equipment, HVAC equipment etc.) in their own directories. If you want to display more or different attributes in the Associate Attributes to Connectors dialog box then make appropriate changes in the ConnectorAttributes.txt file using a text editor like WordPad. The location of the Connector Attributes file must be correctly referenced in the project resource management file. You must save the CATPart file to the directory in which you store the parts that you create.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 289
5. Click OK on the Modify Connector or the Define Plane dialog box when done. Remove the compass from the connector by dragging it to the axis.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 290
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 291
When you click the Modify button in the Manage Connectors dialog box with a light part or standard part displayed, the Modify Connectors dialog box that displays will be grayed out. This is because the Build Connector command should not be used to create or modify connectors on light or standard parts. The grayed out dialog box is displayed only to allow you to see the properties of the connector. If you want to modify them you must use the Define Connectors command in the Create Part dialog box.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 292
3. Select the connector you want to duplicate and click Duplicate in the Manage Connectors dialog box. The Duplicate Connectors dialog box displays.
4. Enter the spacing between the connectors and the number of connectors you want.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 293
5. Drag the compass and place it on a surface with the Z axis pointing toward the direction in which you want the new connectors located. The two illustrations below show how you can change the location of the new connectors by changing the direction of the Z axis.
6. Click OK.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 294
1. To change the orientation of an axis, click on the dot at the end of it. It will flip 180 degrees.
2. To move the manipulator along any axis, click and drag on that axis. The manipulator will move and the distance will display. 3. Click on the origin (red square) and drag to move the manipulator to a new plane. 4. To change the orientation you can also click and drag any of the arcs in the manipulator to rotate it. It will rotate in increments, which is 15 degrees in the image below.
To change the degree of rotation click Tools-Options, select Equipments & Systems and select the General tab. Enter the degree of rotation in the Snap Angle field. For instance, if you enter 45, the manipulator will snap in increments of 45 degrees, counting its starting position as 0. It will snap to the nearest 45 degree step - if you move it to 88 degrees from its starting position it will snap to 90 degrees.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 295
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 296
Show/Hide Connectors
This task shows you how to hide or show connectors. Connectors may be hard to select during certain processes, such as when you are in cache mode, or trying to select a connector in a hole. This step makes them visible so that you can select easily. 1. Click the Show/Hide Connector button . This button may be located in the lower toolbar. 2. Select the part whose connectors you want shown. The connectors display.
3. To hide the connectors, click the Show/Hide Connector button and select the part again.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 297
Line IDs used in the document. Each line ID you create has a file associated with it. These may be in the default directory, or your system administrator may have designated a different directory. To find out which directory it is click on Tools - Project Management select the Browse tab and scroll to the directory under Resources for your application. Resolved parts. These may be in the default directory, or your system administrator may have designated a different directory. To find out which directory it is click on Tools - Project Management select the Browse tab and scroll to the directory under Resources for your application. The setup data, such as that relating to standards, specifications catalog and design rules. If you want to make changes to the document at the new site then you must also move the relevant catalogs. If you only want to view it then you do not need to move the catalogs. To find out more about setup data read Understanding Project Resource Management.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 298
Migrating V4 Models to V5
This section explains how you can migrate your V4 models to V5. To explain the process briefly, you have to convert the classes and attributes in your V4 Project Registration Model to an XML file and ftp it to a V5 directory. You have to do the same with the classes and attributes in your V5 Feature Dictionary. A tool compares these two XML files and another tool then imports the classes and attributes that do not exist in V5 from the V4 XML file and makes them available to you in V5. You also have to export V4 piping lines, standards and parts to V5 and bring all the migrated data together before migrating the model. The migration process places a part into the new V5 document from a V5 catalog of migrated parts. Piping parts are migrated once and placed into a V5 catalog from which they are selected as needed, based on the attributes of the V4 part that is to be migrated. A process is also available to export all piping parts as catalog parts from a piping model. Another process allows you to create parts from an import file and place these parts in a catalog. If you decide not to use the sample directories provided with this application for your data then you must enter your new location, as needed by this process. To learn how to customize line thickness, see documentation for Interactive Drafting in the section Advanced Tasks/Manage Standards. Once defined, line thickness is applied to elements as a property. You should generally follow the following sequence for migrating models: Create a directory structure if you plan to store your migrated data in a location other than the location in which the sample data is stored. Classes and attributes:
G
Export V4 Project Registration Data Export V5 Feature Dictionary Data Compare the XML Output Import the XML Output
V4 piping data:
G
You created a directory structure earlier, but you also need to create/modify set up data, which refers to design
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 299
Creating a Directory Structure Exporting the V4 Project Registration Model Exporting the V5 Feature Dictionary Comparing the XML Output Importing the XML Output Exporting V4 Standards Data Exporting V4 Catalog Parts Exporting V4 Piping Lines Creating/Modifying Setup Data Migrating the V4 Model Exporting Parts from a V4 Model Importing Parts from Other Software
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 300
1. 2.
Create a directory and give it any suitable name. Create a DiscreteValues directory under it and move into it the data from the sample DiscreteValues directory. Create directories for all the disciplines that are of interest to you (Piping, HVAC, etc.). Recreate the directory structure under them as it exists under MigrationDirectory. You do not need to move the sample data - sample catalog, sample specifications, etc. - into your newly created directories if you do not intend to use it. Change the entries in your project resource management (PRM) file to reflect the new location of your data. The sample PRM file points to the default locations. Most entries are under the heading AEC Migration Discipline Resources.
3.
4.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 301
2. Select the context you want. In the image above the context Process Discipline is selected.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 302
3. You now need to change a setting. Click Settings - User Interface Level in the menu bar to display the AEC Frame User Interface Mode box.
4. In the Display Information On field select Current Context Only. If you have not selected a context then select All Project. 5. Now you need to enter the command that will create the XML file. In the key-in line enter /aecrprj and hit Enter. The Report the Project Registration box displays.
6. Enter the directory in which you want to save the XML file and check the line Report All Data in One File. Click OK. The XML file will be generated and stored in the directory you specified. If you specified All Project then the file name will be Preg_All.xml. If you specified a context then the name will be related to that context. NOTE: An html file will also be generated. You do not need this file and can delete it. 7. Place the XML file in the directory ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\dictionary\ V4_Exported_XML so that it is available to your V5 applications. The V4 project registration model must be moved to the following directory, by ftp or any other method: ...intel_a\startup\AEC\preg. The project registration model is used by both Plant and Ship Review applications and by the migration process.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 303
--direnv
Replace Environment_name with the name of the environment you are using. Your system administrator should be able to give you this information. Replace ..\application data\ DassaultSystemes\CATEnv with the full path to your environment directory, in this case CATEnv. The environment file (...\CATEnv\Environment_name.txt) must have correct settings for CATDictionaryPath (...intel_a\code\dictionary) and CATGraphicPath (...intel_a\resources\graphic). If it has a setting for CATDisciplinePath it should be the same as the path you defined above. Do not leave this setting blank. This command will override the path you set in an earlier step (set CATDisciplinePath). You should adjust your steps accordingly.
After you execute the command, the Data Export Application dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 304
2. The Choose Modeler for Export window displays all the modelers available to you. Simply put, a modeler contains the list of applications whose CATfct files will be exported. The PlantShip Modeler seen here includes all plant-ship applications as of R10. Select the modeler you need. Even if an entry is highlighted, as in the image above, you should click on it. 3. In the Output File field browse to or enter the directory path and name of the file where you want the XML output to be placed. If you select an existing file then it will be overwritten. If you enter the name of a file that does not exist then a new file will be created. 4. Once you have filled in these fields the Export button will become available. Click on it to generate the XML content. A message will inform you when the process is complete. The image below shows an excerpt from a generated XML file.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 305
The next step will be to compare the classes and attributes contained in the V4 and V5 XML files.
Piping Design
This task shows how to compare the V4 and V5 classes and attributes. This task should be performed after you have exported the V4 project registration model and the V5 feature dictionary. Your goal is to have a mapping table that shows the V4 classes and attributes you want to import and their corresponding V5 classes and attributes. Once you have converted and exported the V4 and V5 classes and attributes, the two must be compared to determine which ones do not exist in V5. This is done by a tool developed for the purpose. Once you have run this tool it will produce three files which tell you: which classes have problems (do not exist in the mapping table or the XML file of V5 classes), which classes need to be added to V5 and an overall report of what the tool has performed. This step is not needed if you did not define new classes and attributes in V4. Before you begin this process you must set the directory path - this tells the tool the directory path in your installation. Open a command prompt and move to the directory intel_a\code\bin.
G
In Windows, press Enter after typing: set AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH= XXX\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory where XXX is the directory path to your installation. Do the same in Unix, but replace "set" with "export". The user can check the current path by executing the comparator, or executing CATAecDictionaryComparator -h. The comparator will show the path as the first line of output.
1. To run the tool open a command prompt, change to the directory ...intel_a\code\bin, and enter the following: CATAecDictionaryComparator -i (V4file) (V5file) -m (name of mapping table) -o (name for output) Where:
G
(V4file) is the XML file which contains the V4 classes. It must include the XML extension. (V5file) is the XML file which contains the V5 classes. It must include the XML extension. (name of mapping table) is the name of the mapping table against which you want to compare. The default mapping table provided with this application is V4ToV5ObjectMapping.csv. You must include the .csv extension. The mapping table is in the following directory: intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDiretory\Dictionary\Mapping Table. (name for output) is the name for the three output files. If you enter the name MAR, for instance, then three files will be produced: MAR.html, MAR.xml and MAR.csv.
An entry may look like this: CATAecDictionaryComparator -i Preg_ALL.xml catpiping.xml -m V4toV5ObjectMapping.csv -o MAR
2. When the tool (called Comparator) has finished running it will produce three reports and place them in the following Page 307 directories: XML and CSV files in Version 5 Release 16 Piping Design intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\Dictionary\DDL_Files and the HTML file in ...\Reports.
Open the HTML file in a Web browser to see a full report. The report begins with a table of contents that is hyperlinked to the entries. (The names in parentheses are internal names.) The entries in the report are color coded as follows:
G
Green: No action was taken. The V4 class appears in the mapping table and the XML file of V5 classes. Blue: The V4 class appears in the mapping table, but not in the V5 XML file. Red: The V4 class was not found in the mapping table or V5 XML file. Orange: V5 mapping does not exist in the mapping table ("no mapping"), or is badly mapped.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 308
3. Open the XML file (using a text editor like Wordpad) to see a list of the classes that do not exist in the V5 feature dictionaries and can be imported. <Class Name="PipingPartFunc" DisplayName="Piping Part Function" Superclass="Component_Function" Creator="System" Domain="PIP" UUID="b7acacd1_83_3a707981_10"> 4. Open the CSV file using Microsoft Excel. It will look similar to the image below, except that it will not have the entries shown in the first line (shaded red).
In the first three columns this table displays existing in V4. with whatever you want the Page 309 Versionclasses 5 Release 16You should fill in the 4th, 5th and 6th columns Piping Design
corresponding entry to be in V5. In column 7 you should enter the domain, or application. (PIP=Piping Design, PID= Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams, EQT= Equipment Design, HVA=HVAC Design, etc.) An asterisk in the Attribute column indicates that the entry is a class. If it has attributes then the lines that follow it will list the attributes under the same class name. In the example above, Line 2 shows a class. Lines 3, 4 and 5 show that the entries are attributes of the class Piping Line and are called Size, Part Description and Design Speed.
NOTE: V5 entries should refer to the internal name of the class or parent. The internal name is the name within the application and is not the one the user sees. Frequently it is similar, though, and the class name Piping Line may have the internal name PipingLine. You can find the internal name by looking at the V5 XML file where it's referred to as Name and Superclass. 5. Once you have entered the information you need to copy and paste it into the mapping table - in the current example it is V4ToV5ObjectMapping.csv, found in intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\Dictionary\MappingTable. However, you should not directly modify the table the table with the .csv extension. In this same directory you will find a table with the same name but with the extension .xls. Modify this table, save it, and then save it again as a .csv file also. It is faster for this application to read .csv files.
6. If you have V4 classes and attributes that do not have equivalent classes and attributes in V5 then you must repeat the steps explained in Importing the XML Output. You can repeat these steps as many times as you want - until you are satisfied that your mapping table has all the V4 classes and attributes you want and the corresponding V5 classes and attributes.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 310
2.
3. 4.
The Choose Modeler for Import window displays all the modelers available to you. Simply put, a modeler contains the list of applications whose CATfct files will be updated with new classes, if there are any. The PlantShip Modeler seen here includes all plant-ship applications as of R10. Select the modeler you need. Even if an entry is highlighted, as in the image above, you should click on it. In the Input File field browse to or enter the name of the XML file that was output by the comparing process (Comparing the XML Output). The file is placed in the directory: intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\Dictionary\DDL_Files. Once you have filled in these fields the Import button will become available. Click on it to begin the importing process. Your existing CATfct files will not be overwritten. If they do not contain a class or attribute that exists in the XML file then it will be added. The process will create a new CATfct file if something is added to it. The new file name will contain the word "new". If an existing CATfct file to which an entry was added was named XXX.CATfct, then the new file will be XXX_new.CATfct You should examine the new file and rename it as necessary - in most cases you will want it to have the original name, XXX.CATfct.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 311
5.
A report appears in the Data Import Application dialog box window at the end of the process, listing all classes and attributes that were added.
6.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 312
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 313
3. Set the Import/Export toggle switch to Export. 4. Select a standard, such as ASTL. 5. Enter a file name, say All_tables, in the Content List File Name field. The table type and table name of all tables that are exported will be included in this file. The file itself will need to be moved to V5 and is needed in the migration process. 6. Select all the tables you want to export in the Table Type list. The tables will display in the Contents List as you select them. If more than one table is associated with a table type then the table names will display. Select all or as many as you need. You do not need to export certain tables. These are: End dimension, Part dimension, End symbol definition, Pipe support, Insulation specs and ISO part mapping. 7. When you have selected all the tables for one standard you can change to another standard and repeat the process with the tables associated with it. You may not need to select your specifications tables again. 8. When you have selected the tables you need from all your standards click the Apply button. All the tables you selected will be placed in the ...setup\PRO\table directory. The file All-tables will also be placed there. 9. Go to the PIPSETUP function, and the menu Catalog - Pipe Spc - Create. Select a Pipe Spec name and note which tables your specification uses. One way to determine this is to note the table name - the name of the specification will be included in it (not all tables are named this way). Note the table names because they are needed in a later step. 10. Transfer, by ftp or any other method, all the tables as well as the All_tables file to your V5 application. They should be placed in the following directory: intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\ V4_Exported_Tables. 11. You now need to edit the All-tables file (using a text editor like Notepad) to include the name of the V5 directory where each table must be placed. It is best to make a copy of the All_tables file and edit the copy. The entries as exported from V4 will look like this: /*Table,Filter*/ Nominal OD,ASTL-Nominal_OD Schedule,ASTL-Schedule Wall Thickness,ASTL-Wall_Thickness End Style,ASTL-End_Style Rating,ASTL-Rating Material Category,ASTL-Material_Category You need to change the header and add a comma and the name of the directory as a third field. The directory name must either be a standard name (ASTL) or specification name (CS150R) for the transparent automatic parts, compatibility rules and process function mapping rules tables. For an example see MigrationDirectory\Piping Systems\V4_Exported_Tables\V5_TableMigrationList_sample.txt. V4 Table Type,V4 Table Name,V5 Folder Name Nominal OD,ASTL-Nominal_OD ,ASTL Schedule,ASTL-Schedule ,ASTL Wall Thickness,ASTL-Wall_Thickness ,ASTL End Style,ASTL-End_Style ,ASTL
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 314
Rating,ASTL-Rating ,ASTL Material Category,ASTL-Material_Category,ASTL 12. If a table is used in more than one specification then you may have to duplicate the rows. Refer to the notes you made in Step 9 to identify the tables used by a specification. In the example below, the table 3D Part Function - In-line Instrument, FUNCTION_TABLE_INLINE_INSTRUMENT does not mention any specifications. If you want to use it in all four specifications then you must duplicate the rows and add the specification name to each row. 3D 3D 3D 3D 3D Part Part Part Part Part Function Function Function Function Function Inline Instrument,FUNCTION_TABLE_INLINE_INSTRUMENT,CS150R Inline Instrument,FUNCTION_TABLE_INLINE_INSTRUMENT,CS300R Inline Instrument,FUNCTION_TABLE_INLINE_INSTRUMENT,CS600R Inline Instrument,FUNCTION_TABLE_INLINE_INSTRUMENT,SS150R In-line Instrument,FUNCTION_TABLE_INLINE_INSTRUMENT
Make sure there are no trailing blanks at the end of each row. 13. Open a command prompt window and change directories to intel_a\code\command. Enter the following line and hit Enter: CATAecV4ToV5PipingTables.bat (name of file) where (name of file) is the name of the file which you edited in Step 10. It should include the file extension. You need to edit the bat file if you use a standard that is not named ASTL. Find the letters ASTL in the file and change them to the name of your standard. All the tables will be placed in the following V5 directory (unless you set the AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH variable to a different location): intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\ V5_Migrated_Tables 14. Move the tables to wherever you need to have them. You will need to add references to these tables in the appropriate CATProduct and catalog files. See MigrationDirectory\Piping for an example.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 315
/* */ *TYPE create_CCAPS_index *INPUT /aecsite424/setup/PRO/catlg/PRTDA005 *OUTPUT /aecsite424/setup/PRO/catlg/PRTMG005 *KEYS PARTDEF CATEGORY 8 PARTDEF PARTTYPE 8
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 316
PARTNUM PARTNO 40 PIPESIZE SIZE 40 ELCATLOG ELTIME 16 STANDATA STANDARD 8 VNDRCODE VNDRCOD 40 PARTNAME PARTNAME 40 PIPESPEC ENDS 40 ENDSPEC ENDS 40 ENDSPEC RATG 40
3.
Also in the ...\catlg directory enter at a prompt: run catutil -l RF0CPT -i migrate005 -o migrationindex.out This will create the file PRTMG005 in the ...\catlg directory. Ignore error messages "Undefined Attribute Group Name". This only indicates that pipes do not have part end styles and parts do not have pipe end styles.
4.
Move the the PRTMG005 file to its V5 location, in the directory: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\ V4_CatalogMainFile
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 317
5.
Move all the <timestamp> files that were created when you uncompressed your V4 catalog to their V5 location: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\ V4_Catalog_Details. They are called timestamp files because each file will have a date and time stamp for a file name as shown below:
6.
You must migrate the standard encode/decode tables from V4 using CATAecV4ToV5PipingTables before you start the migration of piping parts. The migrated tables must reside in ...MigrationDirectory\Piping Systems\V5_Migrated_Tables\ASTL (or another directory with your standard's name).
In V5, open a command prompt window and change directories to ...intel_a\code\command. Type in the following and hit Enter: CATAecV4ToV5PipingCatalog.bat 005 (replace the numerals 005 with your catalog number). This will create your V4 parts in V5, placing them in ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\ V5_Generated_CATParts (unless you set the AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH variable to a different location). Each part will have a unique, generic part name. For Unix execute the script CATAecV4ToV5PipingCatalog.sh 005 (replace 005 with your catalog number). Create a parts catalog, a suggested name being PipingParts005.catalog, and place the parts in it. See ...MigrationDirectory\Piping\Piping Design\ComponentCatalogs for an example.
7.
8.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 318
2.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 319
Piping Design
5.
Version 5 Release 16
Parts Catalog
Page 320
Under your \Piping directory create a directory structure called \PipingDesign\ComponentCatalogs\CatalogXXX, where XXX is your catalog number. See the sample migrated piping discipline for an example. In the \CatalogXXX directory you will place your migrated catalog parts and your parts catalog. You will probably not want to borrow and edit an existing piping parts catalog because of the number of part entries you would have to delete. You can copy the empty sample catalog in \intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\V5_Catalog, and rename it. Bring up the application and add all of your parts to it. Refer to Modifying a Catalog for more information. You can use the Create/Modify catalog button to add your parts to the catalog. 6. PRM File Edit the project resource management (PRM) file because the final two steps need to reference your standard data. In \intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\ProjectData\Project.xml, you can define a new discipline in that PRM file, or copy it and rename it (e.g., ProjectABC.xml), and then edit the Migration section to reference your new discipline resources. Before bringing up the application during the next steps, you need to set the CATDisciplinePath variable. In Windows: set CATDisciplinePath=XXX\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\ProjectData In UNIX: export CATDisciplinePath=XXX\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\ProjectData Where XXX is your installation path. When you bring up the application and open a piping document, you must go to Tools + Project Management and choose your discipline to make it active. 7. Specifications Catalog Now that you have built your parts catalog, you can edit the parts sections of your piping specifications catalog. You need to define part queries in your specifications catalog. To aid you in defining these queries, you will need to reference your V4 class catalog definitions. In V4, go to the PIPSETUP function and to the menu Catalog + Options, set your catalog number, then go to Catalog + Pipe Spc + Generate. Select All, and then Export. The file CLSEXxxx, where xxx is your catalog number, will be created in setup/PRO/catlg. You will need to reference this file as you define your class queries in your V5 specifications catalog.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 321
The first row of your CLSEXxxx file contains "/*". The fifth row contains "*/". Rows 2, 3, and 4 begin with PSPEC. You can consider row 4 as containing the column headings of attribute names. The rows that follow, starting with row 6, each contain a "part class query", with encoded values for certain attributes. An asterisk ("*") beside a value indicates that this is a value for a "generic attribute", whose encoded value will be used in the part number of a fully resolved piping part. You will see that the fourth part entry, row 9, has a pipe specification of CS150R, a pipe standard of ASTL, a part category of Valve, a part function of Gate Valve, a size range from .5 to .75, a (generic) material category of CS (carbon steel), a (generic) material code of A105, a rating1 of 800, a wall thickness1 of .0000, an end style1 of SW (socket weld), an end style2 of TH (threaded), and other (2/3/4) wall thickness values of .0000. See Creating a Specification Catalog to learn how to create an attribute filter file and use it to define all your part queries. CREATING A V5 ATTRIBUTE FILTER FILE You can edit the V4 CLSEXxxx file and turn it into a V5 attribute file by following these instructions: a. In Windows NT, copy CLSEXxxx to CLSEXxxx.txt. Open CLSEXxxx.txt. Remove rows 1(/*), 2, 3, 5, and 6(*/). Old row
b. c.
d. e. f.
(e.g., Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-MaterialCategory.txt) to edit each row in this column: change CS* to Carbon steel*; CS to Carbon steel; etc. h. Rename the column called Material code to MaterialCode. You will likely not have to edit the rows under this column, but
g.
4 (PSPEC,Standards,Category ...) should now be the top row and the remaining rows should be the V4 queries. Copy CLSEXxxx.txt to V5SpecxxxInput.csv. Open V5SpecxxxInput.csv. It will open in Microsoft Excel. Save it as V5SpecxxxInput.xls. Open V5SpecxxxInput.xls. You may wish to save this beginning version and then save intermediate versions as you edit this file, because it will take several hours. (Hint: Replace All will do most of your work. If you have many catalogs, you may wish to merge all of your V5SpecxxxInput.xls files together into one file, then edit headers and values once, then break the file apart again. This is so you will not have to do the same Replace All operation in many different files.) The first row contains the headers for each column. Delete all columns that are completely empty under the header name. You may also wish to delete the Primary Option Flag column and the Wall thickness columns. Rename the column called Standards to Standard. In front of this column insert a new column called PartType. For each row, under the column called PartType, enter the appropriate V5 part type. Use the entries in the two columns Category and Function to determine the approximate name of the part type, and use the part type browser in CATIAV5 to determine the exact name of the V5 part type. For example, for Category/Function Branches/Tee, use PartType Tee. For Category/Function Valve/Gate Valve, use PartType Gate Valve. For Category/Function Flanges/Blind flange, use PartType Blind Flange (note the f became F). For Category/Function Elbows/90 Degree Elbow, use PartType Elbow (and delete any duplicate rows, because 45 Degree Elbow will also map to Elbow). For Category/Function Gasket/, use PartType Gasket. And for Category/Function Pipe/, use PartType Pipe with bends (do not use V5 Pipe; V4 pipes are bendable pipes not straight pipes). Then delete the columns Category and Function. Rename the column called Material category to MaterialCategory. Refer to your material category encode/decode table
j. Rename the column called Part code to PartCode. Make sure every code in the column is in your part code table (e.g., k. Rename the column called Rating 1 to Rating. Refer to your rating encode/decode table (e.g., 300 to 300#; etc.
check your material code encode/decode table (e.g., Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-MaterialCode.txt) table to make sure. If you edit any value with an * at the end, make sure it still has an * at the end after you finish your edit. i. Rename the column called Part name to PartName. The rows under this column will likely already have the decoded values.
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-PartCode.txt).
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-Rating.txt) to edit each row in this column: change 150 to 150#; change
l. Rename the column called Schedule 1 to Schedule. Refer to your schedule encode/decode table (e.g.,
m. Rename the column called End style 1 to EndStyle. Refer to your endstyle encode/decode table (e.g., change RF to RAISED FACE; etc.
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-Schedule.txt) to edit each row in this column: change STD to STANDARD; change STD* to STANDARD*; change XS* to EXTRA STRONG*; change 160 to SCHEDULE 160; etc. Be careful to maintain existing *, but do not add * when not needed. Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-EndStyle.txt) to edit each row in this column: change BW to BUTT WELD; Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-EndStyle.txt) to edit each row in this column: change SW to SOCKET
n. Rename the column called End style 2 to EndStyle2. Refer to your endstyle encode/decode table (e.g., WELD; etc.
o. Rename the column called Start size range to MinOutsideDiameter(in). You may wish to change in (inches) to mm row values, changing them from V4 nominal size values to V5 actual size values (outside
(millimeters) or m (meters) or to another unit, depending upon the unit your data uses. You will be editing the
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 322
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-NominalSize.txt) and your standard pipe dimensions table (e.g., Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-PipeDimensions.txt). Find the unit used for OutsideDiameter in your
standard pipe dimensions table and use that unit for MinOutsideDiameter. Your standard pipe dimensions table may have different outside diameter values for the same nominal size for different schedules. Edit the V4 nominal size value in the MinOutsideDiameter(in) column with the appropriate V5 outside diameter value, taking care to use the correct value for the schedule defined in your row. You may wish to use a slightly smaller value to insure against any roundoff errors. For example, you may change 0.5 to 0.84 (or
p. Rename the column called End size range to MaxOutsideDiameter(in). You may wish to change in (inches) to mm row values, changing them from V4 nominal size values to V5 actual size values (outside
smaller to 6.62).
(millimeters) or m (meters) or to another unit, depending upon the unit your data uses. You will be editing the
diameter real number, not nominal size character string). Refer to both your nominal size table (e.g., Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-NominalSize.txt) and your standard pipe dimensions table (e.g., Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-PipeDimensions.txt). Find the unit used for OutsideDiameter in your
standard pipe dimensions table and use that unit for MaxOutsideDiameter. Your standard pipe dimensions table may have different outside diameter values for the same nominal size for different schedules. Edit the V4 nominal size value in the MaxOutsideDiameter(in) column with the appropriate V5 outside diameter value, taking care to use the correct value for the schedule defined in your row. You may wish to use a slightly larger value to insure against any round off errors. For example, you may change 4 to 4.5 (or
larger to 6.63).
q. Now save your file. Also save it as an intermediate file for any future reference. Copy this file several times, one for each
V5SpecxxxInput_CS150R.xls and V5SpecxxxInput_CS300R.xls). r. Edit each of these input specification files. Remove the rows that do not apply to this specification, and then delete the PSPEC column. Save each file. s. Start CATIAV5R14. Open your Piping Specifications catalog. Double-click on the first specification defined, but not
Specification you have defined in it. Name the new files with each specification name (e.g.,
Default. Select the icon for Create/Modify Catalog. Define the Application as Piping. Define the Parts directory (e.g.,
Piping\PipingDesign\ComponentCatalogs\Catalogxxx). Define the Attribute filter (e.g., Piping\Specification\V5SpecxxxInput_CS150R.xls). Select Documents: File base (since Model Migration can only be done in File base, not ENOVIA base). Select OK. This may take an hour or
8.
more, depending upon the number of catalog part documents and the number of rows in your attribute filter input file. When done, save your Piping Specifications catalog and then repeat the process for each of your piping specifications. t. You now have a completed migrated Piping Specifications catalog. Piping Lines After performing the task Exporting V4 Piping Lines, you will have an Import file that you can use in V5 to create your V4 piping lines in V5. Before performing the Import step of that task, you had to set up your piping discipline and PRM file. You will likely want to copy the V4 migrated piping lines and catalog from \intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\Piping\SampleData\PipingLines to your own piping lines directory (\Piping\SampleData\PipingLines). This will be the piping lines catalog your PRM file should reference and which your Import Line IDs operation will update.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 323
2.
Set the following variables. In Windows, open a command prompt window and change to the directory ...intel_a\code\command. Enter the following: set CATDisciplinePath=XXX\intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\ProjectData where XXX is the directory path to your installation. In Unix use the command "export" instead of "set". For Structures models only, you need to set the following: set CATCGMBigScale=1 (in Unix replace set with export). The batch shells CATAECV4ToV5Migration.bat (Windows) and CATAECV4ToV5Migration.sh (Unix) assume you edited the project resource management (project.xml) file. If you copied and renamed it then you must edit this batch shell and replace "Project" with your own file name (as referenced by AECMIGR_PROJECT variable). For Tubing Design use the batch shell CATAECV4ToV5MigrTubing.bat (.sh for Unix). For all other applications use the batch shell named above. For Tubing Design, when migrating models, the project resource management file must reference a proper tube dimensions table in order to map outside diameter to nominal size. In the PRM file find the 'TubingDimensions' entry and correct the location if necessary. At the ...intel_a\code\command prompt, enter CATAECV4ToV5Migration.bat (.sh for Unix) to execute a bat file. (For Tubing use the file named in Step 2). This will bring up the Migration Batch dialog box.
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 324
4. 5.
In the Target Directory field enter (or navigate to by clicking the button) the directory where the migrated V4 model will be stored. Click the Browse File button and, in the box that displays, navigate to the directory where you stored your V4 models. Select (you can select more than one if you want to) a model and click Open. The V4 model will display in the V4 Documents to Migrate window of the Migration Batch dialog box. You can use the Remove button to remove files you do not want to migrate.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 325
6.
7.
If you are migrating a 2-D model then you need to set the path for certain files by clicking the Options button. The process is explained in the Infrastructure User Guide: Customizing Customizing Settings - General - Compatibility - V4 Data Reading - and scroll down to PROJECT File Path. Click the Migrate button. When the process is complete the Migrate Report will display. You can also to see the report. If the migration was successful you will get an OK click the Report button message. If you get a message that says "Error during migration" then you must check for mistakes and repeat the process. Your V4 model is migrated as several documents, as explained below.
8.
The V4 model will be migrated as several documents, and each one will display in the specifications tree when you expand it.. Each object in the document will be in a separate document. To open the document click File - Open on the application menu bar and navigate to the directory you specified in the Target Directory field. The document with the same name as the V4 document is the "master" document, which contains (references to) all the components. Other documents underneath it will have identifying letters - such as EQ for Equipment - to indicate what they contain. The document will contain references to all parts - piping or tubing documents, for instance, will contain references to all parts that are in the piping or tubing line. Similarly, equipment documents will contain references to parts and nozzles that make up the equipment. You need all the files to recreate the document.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 326
1.
Place your V4 model in the V5 directory listed above. You can ftp it or place it there using any other method you prefer. In V5, open a command prompt window and change to the directory: ...intel_a\code\command. Enter the following line and press Enter: CATAecV4ToV5ModelParts.bat XXX.model where XXX is the name of your V4 model. In Unix execute the following command: CATAecV4ToV5ModelParts.sh XXX.model
2.
3.
The generated parts will be placed in the directory: ...MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\V5_Generated_CATParts. Each part will have a unique part number. Parts with the same part number will not be duplicated.
4.
Place these parts in your V5 parts catalog and modify your specifications catalog. You can now migrate the model using the procedure described in Migrating the V4 Model.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 327
They should have the attributes defined - when you run the command explained below, only the attribute values from the imported part will be added or changed in the template CATPart. The attributes should already exist. Pre-existing attributes will not be erased - they will remain after the procedure has been executed. If the CATParts have multiple representations then they will have corresponding CATShape documents. To create the body or physical shape of the part you will have to use the Part Design product, for which a separate license is required. You could, however, get by with the set of sample parts provided with this application if you remove any link to a design table.
2.Define a set of part definition files, or one file containing all part definitions. A part definition file is in XML format and must follow the structure as shown in the sample part definition file which is in: ...MigrationDirectory\PartGeneration\PartDefinitions
You must have separate entries for each size. As you can see, GateFLHW 6 inches and GateFLHW 4 inches have separate entries.
Piping Design
G
Version 5 Release 16
Page 328
The name you enter in the Part Name field will be used to name the part in this application (the part number). The Type field refers to the part type as defined in the feature dictionary. The Template field names the template CATPart document you are using. You can use the same CATPart document for creating different sizes of that part. You can change the attribute names and values as needed, but make sure you follow the format shown above. You can also add a line showing a new attribute, again following this format.
You can use a special program - if you have one or can write one - to extract data from your parts. Or you can use the sample file mentioned above and enter the data in that file. 3. Before you run the commands described in Steps 4 & 5, you must edit the script and enter the location of the Migration Directory (AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH) on your installation. The script is named CATAecPartGeneration.bat and is located in ...intel_a\code\command. Using a text editor like Notepad, change the words "Your Path" in the DIRECTORYPATH field to define the directory path in your installation. A portion of the part generation script is shown below.
If the value of CNEXTOUTPUT equals CONSOLE then a window will inform you of the progress of the process. If you change the value of CONSOLE to a file name and location then the results of the process will be saved in that file. 4.After you have the part definition file and the template CATParts set up, you can run the command to add attributes to the template CATPart and generate resolved parts. The template will not change. Open a command prompt window and change to the directory: ...intel_a\code\command. Enter the following and press Enter: CATAecPartGeneration.bat XXX.xml where XXX is the name of your part definition file. You can run this command several times, if you have more than one part definition file. You will get error messages if there are inconsistencies, such as if the part type in the template CATPart does not match the part type listed in the part definition file (this has been left in the sample part definition file as a test case). A message will inform you when the process is complete and the generated parts will be placed in the directory ...MigrationDirectory\PartGeneration\ResolvedCATParts. For Unix run the command: CATAecPartGeneration.sh XXX.xml
The two images below show the template CATPart "Gate Valve FLHW" and a 4-inch gate valve FLHW after it was generated using the sample part definition file. You can see that the attribute values and geometry have changed.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 329
5.To place the parts you just generated in a catalog, move them from ...MigrationDirectory\PartGeneration\ResolvedCATParts to your desired location. Then you can add them to a new or existing catalog, using the create/modify catalog command.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 330
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 331
This task shows how to complete the setup requirements for creating an isometric drawing from a 3-D document.
It is recommended that you obtain Alias I-Run V3. The setup process is greatly shortened if you use V3 instead of V2, and you do not need to install Microsoft VC++ 6.0 compiler. The setup process using both versions is given below. This procedure only works on the Windows platform. Version 2 You must install certain third party software for this procedure to work. These are Alias I-Run V2, Microsoft VC++ 6.0 compiler and two files from Alias I-Run that may only be available if you have a developer's license. The objective of this setup is to ensure that all applications have access to correct directory paths so that they can work with each other. When you are done with setup you will have generated a file that acts as interface between Piping Design and the third party software, and you will have created certain directories that are needed to create and store the isometric drawings. If necessary, you can also use three design rules table to map terms used in this application to terms used in Alias I-Run. The function also uses the Bolting design table to obtain certain values. See Rules Overview to find out which tables to use.
1. Install the third party software mentioned above. Check to see if the following two Alias files have installed: pisogen.lib; encrypt.lib. If they have not installed then obtain them and install them in the following directory: ...Alias\I-Run 2.0\Development. Using any text editor open the file CATIALinkIso.bat, which is in the following directory: ...intel_a\code\command. There are two 2. fields which you may need to edit. For the entry ISOGEN_DIR = enter the location where I-Run is installed, including the drive letter. For the entry DEV_STUDIO_DIR = enter the location where Visual C++ is installed.
3. In a command prompt window change directories to... intel_a\code\command, enter CATIALinkIso and hit enter. 4. When the file has stopped executing it will have created the file CATIAPcf2Dxf.exe. Move this file from the intel_a\code\command directory to the intel_a\code\bin directory. This file creates the interface between Piping Design and the third party software.
5. Open the I-Run Project Manager: Programs - Alias Isometrics - I-Run V2 - Project Manager.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 332
You need to create three directories that will be used when generating isometric drawings. The process will be mentioned briefly here because full documentation for using I-Run is provided by Alias and should have been loaded along with the application. 6. Click the Create New Isometric Directory button on the Project Manager. A dialog box will display in which you can enter the name and location of a directory. Click Create Directory and then OK and the directory will be created. It will display in the Project Manager - in this example it is IsogenRoot.
7. Select the directory you just created (in this example IsogenRoot) and click the Create New Project Directory button. A dialog box will display in which you can enter a directory name. Click OK to create the directory (Project1 in this example). 8. Select the directory you just created and click the Create New Style Directory button. This directory is used for user-defined configuration of drawings. Under Template Styles select a template. Some templates are not intended for DXF-type files and you will not be able to generate a drawing if you select a template for any other file format. Read I-Run documentation for the correct templates. You can modify the template after you have selected it. Enter a name for the directory and click OK. The directory will be created.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 333
9. In Piping Design click Tools - Options, select Equipment & Systems - Piping Design and the ISOGen Setup tab. If you are doing this for the first time there will be no entries in the fields Root, Project and Style directory. You do not have to enter anything in the first two fields. In the Style field, navigate to the directory you just created. You must not enter anything in the field I-Run.exe path. The field Error File lists the name and location of the file where errors in generating drawings are noted.
For Units, select the units you want displayed in the 2-D drawing that will be generated, i.e. weight can be displayed in the drawing in kilograms or pounds. 10. Version 3 Install Alias I-Run V3. In Piping Design click Tools - Options, select Equipment & Systems - Piping Design and the ISOGen Setup tab. If you are doing this for the first time there will be no entries in the fields Root, Project and Style directory. Enter the full path where the I-Run executable is located in the I-Run.exe path field (the default installation for Alias is: Program Files\Alias\I-Run v3\I-Run.exe). Follow Steps 6 to 9 above.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 334
The select options buttons allow you to select what you want to convert. 2. to select by line ID. When you click this button a dialog box Click the Select Line IDs button will display all line IDs available to you, from which you can make your selection. Everything belonging to the line ID will be converted. 3. Click the Select Spool button button to select by spool. When you click this button all spools available to you will be displayed. Select one or more. Everything belonging to the spool(s) will be converted.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 335
4. Click the Select Elements button Networks dialog box will display. to select a range. When you click this button the Analyze
Click the Network tab and then an object in your document. All objects connected to it will be selected and the name of the object will display in the Selected Object field. All objects connected to the selected object will be converted. You can also select a range within your document. To do this click the Path tab in the Analyze Networks box, select the first object in your range (its name will display in the From Object field) and select the last object in your range (its name will display in the To Object field). It is better to select the objects in the specifications tree, but you can select in the viewer also. All objects within the range will be converted.
5.
Enter a file name for the isometric drawing and hit Enter when you are using the Select Elements options. In other cases a default file name will be generated for the drawing, but it is best to give your own file name because default file names can confuse. If you are converting everything belonging to a line ID, for instance, the file name will be that of the line ID. If you perform the step again the application will create a second file with the same name and the letter "A" (or whatever sequence it is) attached.
6.
Check the box Display ISO drawing if you want to see the drawing when it is generated. If you do not check the box the drawing will be stored and you can view it later.
7.
Click OK to generate the drawing. The Converting Data window will display progress.
8.
When the drawing has been generated the New Drawing dialog box displays. Select any of the options you want and click OK.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 336
9.
If you had checked the Display ISO Drawing option then the drawing will display. It will contain various kinds of information and will display dimensions. You can change unit dimensions by going to the ISOGen Setup tab described in Setup Requirements.
A large drawing will be split into manageable sections and only the first section will display initially. 10. To view the drawing later click the View ISO Drawing button in the toolbar. A window will open at the Drawings directory. This is a subdirectory of the Style directory you created earlier.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 337
1.
You need to create certain directories, with a specific structure, that will be used by the process. You can give then any name you want. There should be a root directory, in this illustration it is called IsogenRoot. Within this directory there should be a second directory, in this example Project1. Within the second directory there should be a third directory, called usersCheck in this example. In addition, you must create a directory within the second directory called Inputs (the generated PCF file will reside in this directory). When you are done you should have this structure:
2.
In Piping Design click Tools - Options, select Equipment & Systems - Piping Design and the ISOGen Setup tab. If you are doing this for the first time there will be no entries in the fields Root, Project and Style directory. Navigate to the directories you just created, in the first three fields, as shown below. You do not need to enter anything in the Error File field.
3.
With your 3-D document open, follow Steps 1 to 4 as explained in Creating an Isometric Drawing. A file with the .pcf extension will be generated and stored in the directory ...IsogenRoot\Project1\Inputs. You can view the file using a text editor.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 338
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 339
1.
If you add a new attribute then you need to modify the file Piping-ISOAttributeMapping.txt. Mapping the attributes and adding the "Type" in the table allows you to display these attributes in the generated drawing. The attributes can be displayed in the generated drawing.You will need to see Alias documentation to find out how to customize the display. Entering the information in the attribute mapping table allows the information to be picked up. There are three columns in the table: G Type: You can enter attributes as one of three types - pipeline, component and description. There is a fourth type in the column, attr-categoryXX, and its usage is explained below.
Any attribute that is typed as 'pipeline' will display in a specific area of the generated drawing, depending on the format you select. If the attribute has a value then the value will be displayed; if there is no value then the value field will be left blank. The following image shows one format you can use to display the information in a drawing.
If the attribute belongs to a component then enter 'component' in the type field. There are several customizable lines in the table that you can modify. The lines display the Alias attribute but not the corresponding V5 attribute. If you create an attribute that corresponds to the listed Alias attribute then you can remove the words USER-DEFINED and enter your attribute. You can also add new lines if you want, entering the V5 and Alias attributes. The display of component attributes in a drawing depends on how you customize it. Use 'description' as the type if you want the values for the attributes to display in a Description column. You can format Alias to add a column with the heading Description to the generated drawings. The values of attributes you type as description will display in this column. The type ATTR-CATEGORYXX is used to add a column to the drawing, to display additional attributes. Some attributes are typed like this in the sample mapping table. To add columns change
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 340
one of the blank lines in the table. There are several lines in the table that read ATTR-CATEGORYXX USER DEFINED USER DEFINED (XX is a number). These are essentially blank lines. If you want to display an attribute value in a column then change the entries 'USER DEFINED' to reflect the names of V5 and Alias attributes. The attribute will be added to the columns already displayed. A drawing can have a maximum of 20 columns. The image below shows one format for displaying attributes in columns in the generated drawing.
In the column AttributeName enter the attribute name used in this application. In the column ISOGenAttributeName enter the equivalent Alias attribute name. You will have to see Alias documentation to determine which name to use.
If you add a new end style then modify the table: Piping-ISOEndStyleMapping.txt 2. The table has two columns:
G
EndStyle: Enter the end style from Piping Design. ISOgenEndStyle: Enter the equivalent Alias end style. You need to refer to Alias documentation to determine which end style to enter.
3.
If you add a new piping symbol then you need to modify the table: Piping-IsoSymbols.txt. Parts have an attribute, Symbol Name, and you need to modify the table if you create a part with a value that is not shown in the table. The table has two columns:
G
Piping-Symbol: Enter a symbol name attribute value that is not included in the table. Iso-Symbol: Enter the equivalent Alias symbol. You need to refer to Alias documentation to determine which symbol to enter.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 341
Drawing Production
This section explains how to customize and create a 2-D drawing from a 3-D document. It differs from the function "creating isometric drawings" in that the drawing production function allows you to customize the way your 2-D drawing will appear. Another significant difference is that a drawing produced using this function is created to scale. Some 2-D endstyle graphics are included with this application. If you need more graphics then you must create them. The catalog in which endstyles are stored is called Graphic Replacement True View Catalog. It is in the following directory: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\Piping (or other discipline)\PipingDesign (or other application)\DrawingCatalog. You need to place all endstyle graphics in the file GraphicReplacementTrueView.CATPart, which is in the same directory, and then link a graphic name in the catalog to the actual graphic. Creation of the drawing correctly also depends on a design table. See Rules Overview and Modifying Design Rules to find out more. Drawing Production Settings Generating a Drawing Defining 2D Endstyle Symbols
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 342
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 343
4.
The file also contains the following ATS_ properties that enable you to generate text from 3-D attributes. G ATS_AutoPosition: Yes positions the text anchor point at the edge of the 2-D box surrounding the generated 2-D geometry. No positions the text anchor point at the approximate center of
the 2-D geometry (center of the first segment for multi-segment pipes).
ATS _CharacterOffset: The number of characters to offset the text anchor point. ATS_1 through ATS_40: Requests to generate text corresponding to the attributes on the 3-D object. Possible values are the Keywords in the catalog XXXPartsAnnotations.catalog (where XXX represents the application, such as Piping or Tubing), and is located in the following directory:
5.
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\(discipline)\(application)\DrawingCatalogs The settings common to all the graphic representations are: G Visible: Yes means the part will be generated in the drawing. No means it will not be generated.
G
Color: The RGB value of the color of the generated part. LineType: The value indicating the line type of the generated part. EndStyleSymbol: Yes means an end style symbol will be displayed in the drawing for each Piping part that has an end style. FabricationBreakSymbol: Yes means a symbol will display at the ends of each spool. CornerBendPoint: If set to Yes, the intersection of adjacent Pipe or Tube segments will display a point. CenterofGravitySymbol: When set to Yes, a symbol is displayed at a part's center of gravity (Equipment only).
6.
Settings for individual graphic representations are as follows: G Graphic representation: Parameters are GR_1, GR_2, and GR_3. Values include Layout, Single, Double, Envelope. If you do not want a representation to display, enter extra characters after the setting to turn off the display. For example, Double_No. or LayoutXY.
G
MaxNominalSize: A part larger than this value will not be generated in the 2-D drawing. No entry means there is no limit. MinNominalSize: A part smaller than this value will not be generated in the 2-D drawing. No entry means there is no limit. LineGapping: Yes means line gapping will display. Applies only to Single graphic representation. LineGappingValue: The length of a gap in a line at a point where it is crossed by another line, in millimeters. Applies only to Single graphic representation. CenterLines: Yes means a center line will display Available only for Pipes and Tubes with a Double graphic representation. CenterLinesExtensionLength: The length by which a center line will extend beyond a Pipe/Tube. LineType: The value indicating the line type (for instance, 1 = solid line). You can define a different line type for each graphic representation within an application. This setting overrides the LineType setting common to all graphic representations. This is further explained in the Drafting application. LineThickness: The value indicating the thickness of the line. You can define a different line thickness for each graphic representation within an application.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 344
7.
Settings for individual graphic representations are preceded by the identifier GR_1_, GR_2_, or GR_3_. For instance, to set a LineType for a GR_2_ graphic representation, use GR_2_LineType. Some 2-D endstyle graphics are included with the Piping application. If you need more graphics, you need to create them. The catalog where Piping endstyles are stored is called Piping2DSymbols-Customization.Catalog, and is in the following directory: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\Piping\Piping Design\DrawingCatalogs You need to place all endstyle graphics in the file Piping2DSymbols-Customization.CATDrawing, located in the same directory, and then link a graphic name in the catalog to the actual graphic. When you create a new endstyle (or modify an existing one), you must enter the correct size in the EndDiameter column of the catalog. Samples included with the application are sized at 25.4 mm, which is the actual size of the detail. This size is important because it is used to scale the endstyle to the size of the component to which it is attached. All endstyles provided with this application, except butt weld, can be scaled. The vertical dimension of your detail will be interpreted as the end diameter. Therefore, the value you enter in the EndDiameter column should reflect this.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 345
Generating a Drawing
This task shows you how to generate a 2-D drawing from a 3-D document. Piping parts are used in this task. The procedure is the same for all types of parts. Before you can use this process, you need to set Options as follows: From the menu bar, select Tools - Options - Mechanical Design - Drafting. Select the Administration tab and uncheck the option Generative View Style. 1. Open the 3-D document from which you want to generate a drawing. 2. From the menu bar, click Start - Mechanical Design - Drafting. Either of two dialog boxes display, depending on the type of parts used in your 3-D document.
G
If the New Drawing Creation dialog box displays, select the Empty Sheet layout and click OK. If the New Drawing dialog box displays, click OK.
3. 4.
A new drawing window opens. Click Window - Tile Vertically to view both the 2-D and 3-D documents.
. Click the Front View button Front View is used for the sample images in this task. Select a view command that allows you to best manipulate and view your document.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 346
The Generative View Style dialog box displays. If it is not already selected, select the XML file that contains the settings you want to use to generate your drawing.
5.
You can select one or more objects in the document, and the generated drawing will include only these objects.
If you do not select an object, the entire document will be used to generate the drawing. Before you define a plane, you can point to a part in the 3-D document and see a preview of the 2-D orientation in the Oriented Preview box. If you have a run displayed in your document, it may interfere with the following steps. You can display a run as Line/Curve section, or hide it to more conveniently complete these steps.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 347
6.
Define a plane by clicking the flat face of a part, or by selecting a plane from the specifications tree. A full preview displays in your 2-D drawing.
7.
You can use the manipulator to change the view. Click anywhere in the 2-D document to generate the 2-D image. The image below was made after specifying the Single graphic representation in the XML file.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 348
The following image shows a Double graphic representation (as specified in the XML file).
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 349
8.
You can update your 3-D document and view the changes in the 2-D image.
After updating your 3-D document, click the Update Current Sheet button
You see the changes reflected in the 2-D drawing. When updating a spool or a group type object, the Update Current Sheet button is unavailable. You cannot view changes in the 2-D image. To view changes in the 2-D image, do the following: After updating the spool, right-click on the spool in the specifications tree. Select Hide/Show from the drop-down menu. Make the 2-D window active, and the Update Current Sheet button is available. Click the Update Current Sheet button in the 2-D image. You see the change reflected in the 2-D drawing. You can get more information on manipulating 2-D drawings in Drafting documentation.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 350
Click OK to create a catalog. 3. Select Endstyle in the specifications tree and the Reference tab to display all the part descriptions.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 351
Delete the descriptions you do not need - right click on a description and, in the drop down menu, select Remove Description. 4. You now have to link the remaining descriptions to an actual drawing. You do this by double clicking on the description to bring up the Description Definition dialog box and following steps explained below. One sequence you could follow is: G Open the drawing that contains the 2D geometry you want to link to a description. NOTE: Each endstyle symbol must be defined in a separate view in the 2D drawing, and each symbol MUST be defined in a 1 inch by 1 inch (25.4 mm) size. Each detail must have the same name as the one that appears under the NAME field in the catalog, and to which you will link.
G
Tile the screen so that you can see the drawing as well as the catalog. Double click on the description (if you haven't done so already) to bring up the Description Definition dialog box. Click on Select External Feature in this box. Select the 2D view containing the geometry you want to associate. The association between the description and the symbol is done. Repeat these steps to associate other symbols to descriptions. Save the catalog and the drawings. Point to the catalog in the project resource management file.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 352
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 353
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 354
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 355
Click the equipment you want to place first, in this case EQ-19. 2. NOTE: Use of the Select Mode buttons is explained in Placing Parts. Refer to that task.
G
If the equipment you selected has a part number defined then you do not have to do anything more than place it. If the Part Type was not defined (it will display in the Place Equipment box), then you need to click on the down arrow in the Part Type field and select a part type.
If the Clear Filter button is enabled it means that values from a previous part placement exist in the Filter Definition dialog box. (See Step 5.) Click the button if you want to clear these values.
Piping Design
G
Version 5 Release 16
Page 356
If you want to change the values of one or more properties of the part you want to filter for, then click the Filter Definition button to display the Filter Definition dialog box. Select the property whose value you want to change and then select the new value from the drop down box in the Value field. (The Value field will display after you select a property.) This new value will appear in the Override value column. The values in the Override value column will be used when searching for parts in the catalog. The Override button brings up the Manage Override Parameters dialog box, allowing you to change attribute values. The Flip Part button allows you to flip parts that can be flipped, such as a reducer. The Move/Rotate button displays the Move/Rotate dialog box, allowing you to manipulate the part. The Pipe Selection and Pipe Segment Shortcut buttons are shortcuts that let you select part type. The Change to Schematic Mode button lets you toggle between schematic and non-schematic mode. You will exit the command when you click this button and need to click the Place Part command again.
3.After you define the Part Type, the Part Selection box will display and you can select a part. If both Function Type and Part Type were defined then the Part Selection box will display when you click on any equipment in the schematic and you can select the part.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 357
Parts and equipment have "ordered placement" capability. To give an example, in the image below if you have placed the valves 1 and 3, then valve 2 will only place between those two. You will not be able to place it to the right of valve 3.
5.Using the procedure described above, continue to place all equipment and nozzles you want to from the schematic. If you assigned names to connectors when you added them (both in the 3-D and schematic application) then your 3-D nozzles will be placed at the correct connector on the equipment - the nozzle will place on the connector which has the same name as the connector in the schematic application.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 358
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 359
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 360
Note: Some of the buttons display after you have selected a run. In the schematic displayed in the Schematic Browser, click on the run you want to create. The 3-D 2. viewer will show a possible route. The function can distinguish the schematic objects (equipment and nozzles only) between which the run existed, and select their 3-D equivalents to route between.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 361
3. If you want the application to show you possible paths between two objects, then select your beginning and end points and click the Display Alternate Path button field showing the number of possible paths: actual paths. 4. by clicking on the down arrow. This affects the Select From/To or Logical Line display of objects in the specifications tree, and the Route Through Hangers option (see below). If you select Logical Line only the logical line will display in the tree. If you select From/To then the objects routed from and to will also display. 5. Once you have a route you want to accept, click OK or the Create the Run button and the run will be created. If you click the button you can select another run. If you click OK you will exit the command. If you named the connectors when you created them (in both the schematic and 3-D applications) then the run will be created between connectors that have the same name as in the schematic. 6. if you want to define a route yourself, such as through one Click the User Defined Path button or more hangers. To route though hangers, click the button and then select the hangers you want to . The first click displays a
route through. The User Defined Path button is only available when the two points you want to route between exist in the 3D window.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 362
The Run dialog box displays other options. These are regular Routing options that are explained in Routing a Run, and allow you to route as you would normally. The Reframe button zoom in on an object in the 3-D viewer. FOR HVAC DESIGN ONLY allows you to
displays in the Type field if the 2D segment you select has the Equivalent The Ductulator button Diameter property defined and valuated. The Ductulator is a tool for calculating the area of a rectangular or square duct that is equivalent to the diameter of a given round duct. It enables you to place the correct-sized duct. Click the Ductulator button to being up the Duct Size Computation dialog box.
The diameter of the line you clicked on is displayed in the Equivalent Diam field. Select a value for the Inside Height property to obtain a value for Inside Width. Or select a value for Inside Width to obtain Inside Height. You should select by clicking on the down arrow next to each field - the values displayed are obtained from your catalog. The Exact Result field displays the exactly computed result - instead of this figure the application will select a size that is available to you. The Aspect Ratio field displays the aspect ratio of the two values.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 363
This task shows how to analyze a document that has been created using a schematic. This function allows you to determine that parts placement is in accordance with the schematic drawing. This procedure allows you to compare the 3-D document you created to the schematic from which it was created for errors and inaccuracies. You can only analyze equipment and parts, not routes.
1. With the 3-D document open, click on Analyze - Functional Physical Integration - Analyze Functional Physical Integration Status. The Analyze Functional Physical Integration dialog box displays, with the associated schematic drawing open. If your 3-D document and schematic are not associated then you need to click the Open button, navigate to the schematic and select it.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 364
The buttons below the tree are used to open a document or manage the display of the tree and schematic. You can click on the down arrow next to the field that reads Logical Line to select another element, which will then display in the tree. Click the Selected Objects option and click on a part in the schematic. Information about the part will appear in the Functional Status 2. window. If the schematic function is associated with a 3-D part then the relevant information will display in the Related Physical Objects window. The two can be dissociated by clicking on the Dissociate button.
3. If the schematic function you clicked is not associated with an object in the 3-D document then the Related Physical Objects window will suggest 3-D objects to which it can be associated, if there are any. In the image below Vessel Function can be associated with two objects in the 3-D document. If you want to associate it then select an object and click the Associate button.
You can also associate a schematic function with a 3-D object by using the Analyze function in the menu bar. With your 3-D document open click Analyze - Functional Physical Integration - Associate Functional Physical Objects. The Associate Functional Physical Objects window will display. Click the Open button to open the schematic you want to use, and select the function you want to associate. Make sure From/To is selected in the drop down menu, and select Entire Model. The window will display the 3-D objects you can associate to. Select one and click Apply and OK. NOTE: It is possible to associate one schematic run segment to more than one 3D run.
You can create an Exception for certain objects, in which case you will not be able to associate to them. These objects will also be overlooked by the Analyze function. With your 3-D document open, click Analyze - Functional Physical Integration - Manage Exceptions. The Exception Manager will display. Select the object for which you want to create an exception and click Create. You can use the same procedure to remove the Exception. 4. Use the Clear List button to clear the entries in the Functional Status window. Select an entry and click Properties if you want to see its properties. 5. Click Analyze. The Inconsistencies dialog box displays, listing any errors. In the illustration below the entries indicate that the valve is not connected to the tank or the pump - only a run is present, there are no pipes or elbows.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 365
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 366
Querying for Penetrations Creating a Cutout Sketch Adding an Object to a Penetration Adding Clash to a Penetration Creating a Penetration Creating a Penetration with Workflow Viewing and Editing Penetration Properties Showing Cutouts
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 367
. The Penetration
Select an object in your document (for instance, a bulkhead or a pipe). Select on the specifications tree (for instance, you can choose a work package or a part related to the penetration). Click the Penetration Activities button and select an activity related to a specific penetration. See below for a more detailed explanation.
The selected object name displays in the Selected object to query field in the Penetration Management dialog box.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 368
2.
The Penetration Management dialog box lists the penetrations associated with the selected object, and the current status. To retrieve geometry that has not been loaded from ENOVIA, select the penetrations you want to query, then click the Load Geometry button .
The list of penetrations is updated. When you select a Penetration ID from the list and click the appropriate command, you can: G Create a cutout sketch (explained in Creating a Cutout Sketch).
G
Add an object to a penetration (explained in Adding an Object to a Penetration). Add clash to a penetration (explained in Adding Clash to a Penetration). View and edit penetration properties (explained in Viewing and Editing Penetration Properties).
can access a penetration (referenced in workflow activity) that has been assigned to you by viewing a list of penetration activities. Selecting an activity accesses a
specific penetration through the Penetration Management dialog box. 3. With your document open, click the Penetration Management button. The Penetration Management dialog box displays.
You
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 369
4. Click the Penetration Activities button displays. and the Choose Penetration Activity dialog box
Select an activity from the list and click OK. The related Penetration ID displays in the Penetration Management dialog box.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 370
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 371
The related objects highlight in your document, and will be used in calculating the penetration location.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 372
2. Click the Create Cutout Sketch button Rules tab selected. and the Create Cutout Sketch box displays with the
The Create Cutout Sketch dialog box displays the shape and size for the proposed sketch, as computed by the design rules.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 373
3.
Click OK if you accept it. You can choose to select a penetration cutout sketch from a catalog.
Select the Standard Catalog tab and the Catalog Browser button
4.
You can choose to create a penetration cutout sketch manually in the Sketcher.
Select the Manual Sketch tab and click the Open Sketcher button
The Sketcher opens. Create your sketch and click the Exit Workbench button. The sketch is placed in your document. 5.
6.
The Place on Side buttons allow you to place the cutout sketch on one side or the other of a structure, and is used for visibility purposes. Click OK. The cutout sketch is associated with the penetration and will be saved when you save to ENOVIA.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 374
You can create a cutout sketch from Rules for a penetration with multiple penetrating objects. On the Rules tab, the list of cutout sketch parameters is blank because the cutout shape cannot be parametric. The Computed using rule field shows the list of rules used, prefixed by <ConvexFit>. The Cutout Shape field displays <ConvexFit>, indicating that a system algorithm was used to combine multiple shapes that were computed from the rules.
Review the cutout sketch and click OK if you accept it. Save your document to save the data in ENOVIA.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 375
Select the penetration for which you want to add an object from the Penetration Management dialog box.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 376
2. Click the Add Object to Penetration button . The Add Objects to Penetration dialog box opens, displaying the Penetration ID you selected.
3. Select the cutout sketch that you want to add to the penetration (either in your document or from the specifications tree), and click OK. The object is added. 4. Click Close to close the Penetration Management dialog box. Save your document to save the data in ENOVIA.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 377
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 378
2. Click the Add Clash to Penetration button displays. and the Add Clash to Penetration dialog box
The Add Clash to Penetration dialog box displays a list of available clashes that can be added to the selected penetration. You can choose to list only penetration candidates by selecting the Show Only Penetration Candidates checkbox. You can also select an additional object to help determine the clash to add to the penetration by entering the object in the Additional Object for Class Search field. Select a Clash ID and click OK. The clash and its clashing objects are added to the penetration. Save your document to save the data in ENOVIA.
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 379
Creating a Penetration
This task shows how to create a penetration from one or more existing clashes using the Create Penetration command. ENOVIA zones, covering the space of the clash, must be created before you can create a penetration. You can create a penetration from multiple clashes when multiple objects (such as two pipes and a conduit) need to pass through a single opening in a structure. You also can create a penetration in ENOVIA. This creates a penetration without workflow. To create a penetration with workflow, see Creating a Penetration with Workflow. 1. With your document (from ENOVIA) open, click the Create Penetration button dialog box displays. . The Create Penetration
Select the object to be penetrated, either from your document or on the specifications tree. 2. The object you select appears in the Object for Clash Search field. The Create Penetration dialog box displays a list of clashes associated with the selected object.
Select one or more clashes from the list and click the Create Penetration button at the bottom of the dialog box. The Specify Penetration Data dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 380
Zone and Discipline information, with data computed from the objects related to the selected clash, appear in the fields. You can accept the supplied information for Zone and Discipline or enter other information, or select from the drop down list. Click OK and a message displays indicating you have created the penetration. Save your document to save the data in ENOVIA.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 381
Select the object to be penetrated (the bulkhead, for instance). 2. The object you select appears in the Object for Clash Search field. The Create Penetration dialog box displays a list of clashes associated with the selected object.
Select one or more clashes from the list and click the Start Penetration Request Process button at the bottom of the dialog box. A confirmation box displays indicating that the workflow process started. Click OK to close the confirmation box. Save your document to save the data in ENOVIA.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 382
2.
Click the Penetration Properties button and the Penetration Properties dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 383
You can change the value of the attributes in the Attributes pane (Description, Abstract, Priority, Zone and Discipline) if you have those privileges in ENOVIA. Double-click an attribute and enter a different value. Click OK. You can add a comment and display it in the History pane. Click the Add History button and the Add History dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 384
Add a comment and click OK. Your comment displays on a new line in the History pane. After you save to ENOVIA and access the Penetration Properties dialog box again, your comment displays in the History pane as Comment along with with the date and your user ID. Save your document to save the data in ENOVIA.
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 385
Showing Cutouts
This task enables you to 1.
With your document open, click the Penetration Management button. The Penetration Management dialog box displays. Select the object (where you want to show the cutouts), either from your document or on the specifications tree. The selected object appears in the Selected object to query field.
If you click the Show Cutouts button again, the cutouts no longer display in your document. If the cutouts display when you click Close in the Penetration Management dialog box, the cutouts remain loaded in your session.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 386
Hole Placement
This section explains placing, defining, modifying and querying holes on piping parts. Placing a Hole on a Part Modifying a Hole Querying Hole Properties
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 387
2.
Select the desired hole type. The tangent-plane appears as a visual aid. Move it to the location you have chosen for the hole and click.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 388
3.
When you click to place the hole the Manage Override Parameters dialog box opens displaying the list of parameters that you can edit.
5. 6.
Edit the parameters as necessary to meet the intended design. Click Apply after you edit each parameter to update the product. When finished editing the parameters click OK. The hole is placed. To modify the hole further, see Modifying a Hole.
When placed, the hole has a connector from which you can continue routing.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 389
Modifying a Hole
This task shows you how to modify a hole that has been placed on a part.
1.
With your document open, select the hole you want to modify in the document or in the specifications tree.
2.
For rectangular parts, i.e. ducts, the hole is placed on the Side: Top, Bottom, Left or Right. When placing a hole on round parts such as tubes, pipes or round ducts the hole placement surface parameter is the Orientation Angle. Tangent Angle is used only with holes placed on round parts. Set this to change the tangent of the connector for subsequent routing. When set to zero, the tangent angle will be the same as the orientation angle. The Inset is the origin of the hole. Making this a positive value, say 1 inch, 'insets' the origin of the hole into the part 1 inch below the surface. A negative value will raise the origin of the hole above the part surface. This is parameter used for both round and rectangular parts. (After 'insetting' the hole in the part you will not be able to select it in the 3D viewer. Click the Edit Part Parameters button and select the hole from the specifications tree.) Center Offset is used when placing a hole on a rectangular part. Set this value to adjust the side-to-side location of the hole. For rectangular hole parts the hole size is modified using the Height and Width parameters. 3. Make the necessary changes to the parameters and click Apply to see the effect. 4. Click OK when finished. The hole is modified.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 390
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 391
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 392
Piping Design
Page 393 Version 5 Release 16from Bendable Pipes Extracting Bending Data and Tubes
This task shows you how to extract bending data from Bendable Pipes and Tubes and transfer it into a Microsoft Excel worksheet. Bending data can be fed into Bending machines to precisely create bends in bendable tubes and pipes.
G
The standard macro supplied with this product displays bending data in a sample format. However, a user with some Microsoft VBScript experience can change the script supplied to change the format. The sample script assumes that the bendable objects are placed on a run under a distribution system or a logical line. For more information on placing parts, see Placing a Part.
1. Using Windows Explorer, locate the intel_a\code\command subdirectory. 2. Copy the files PslTubingExtract.CATScript
and PslTubingExtractTemplate.xls to C:\temp (with read-write access). Select the two files and click the right mouse button. Click Properties in the drop-down menu that displays. The Properties dialog box will display. Uncheck the Read-Only option.
3. In the specifications tree, select the line (piping or tubing) under which the run containing the bendable objects has been placed.
4. Click Tools - Macro - Macros. The Macro dialog box will display. Select External File from the drop down list, select PslTubingExtract.CATScript and click Select. The Select Page 394 Version 5 Release 16 Piping Design External File dialog box will display. Select PslTubingExtract.CATScript and click Open. This will again display the Macro dialog box. Select PslTubingExtract.CATScript and click Run. Data will be extracted from the bendable objects and displayed in an Excel worksheet, part of which is displayed below. (The application will create the table, but you must have Excel installed!)
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 395
Click the Update button whenever you see it active (not greyed out) during this process. Also, don't forget that you need to have the Knowledge Expert product installed for this process. In the following example the maximum bend radius will be checked. 1. 2. Click Start - Infrastructure - Knowledge Expert to enter the Knowledge Expert workbench. Set up your options correctly or you will not be able to do the following steps correctly. G Click Tools - Options and select General from the left column of the window.
G
Click the General tab. Select Automatic for the Update function. Click Product in the left column of the window and scroll to the Product Structure tab. Under the Specification Tree function make sure the Relations and Automatic Expand options are selected.
3. 4.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 396
5. 6.
Select Bendable_CheckMaxBendRadius.CATProduct and click Open. If the desired bend radius violates the bend radius rules, a red light will show against the relevant CATProduct line icon in the specifications tree, in this case CATKWEBendRadiusCheck.1. If there is no violation then a green light will show next to it. In the illustration below the red button is showing (with the mouse pointer pointed at it).
7.
To change the maximum bend radius do the following: Each check has a parameter element beneath it in the specifications tree - in this case it is MaxBendRadius. Double-click on the element to display the Edit Parameter dialog box. Enter your maximum bend radius in this box. To check for rest length and total run length select the appropriate CATProduct in the Load Report dialog box. Make sure it has the word "check" in it.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 397
You can add mechanical features to the rib, such as endstyles and intersections, and they will be retained.
2.
3.
To enable this feature change the value of the Location field for the resource BendablePolyLine in the Project Resource Management file. A value of 1 means it is enabled, 0 means it is disabled. By default this feature is disabled. You must make this change in the PRM file at application level, for each application in which you want it. Note: Users should not modify the polyline of a bendable by adding or deleting points, nor should they import other points.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 398
Computed Attributes
This section provides several tables, each of which lists Knowledgeware computed attributes and methods for a specific product or discipline. Unlike the Feature Dictionary attributes, which are user customizable, you cannot modify the value of computed attributes. Computed attributes are so called because the software computes their values based upon other data in your document. For example: In the Compartment and Access product, you can create a compartment consisting of 6 boundaries: 4 walls, a floor and a ceiling. There is a computed attribute (for compartments) called TotalSurfaceArea that is calculated based on the individual surface areas of each boundary. Also included in these tables are methods. Methods can take input parameters and return values which enable you to define checks and rules based on the values you provide. Please note that the computed attributes and methods in the PlantShipLayout Knowledgeware dictionary can apply to several products and disciplines. This dictionary contains higher-level object types that other products and disciplines can inherit. You can access computed attributes and methods in Knowledgeware rules and checks. Computed attributes are also accessible through the Edit - Search dialog, the Tools - Report Definition dialog, and the Insert Link Template dialog when defining a text template (in schematic diagrams). The organization of these computed attributes and methods matches that of the Knowledgeware dictionary. Piping
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 399
Piping
The following computed attributes and methods are in the PipingLayout Knowledgeware dictionary. Not all methods take input parameters, and for those that do, the parameters are described in the Description column. Whether you can see the value returned by the method depends upon how you are using it in Knowledgeware. For example, if you write a Knowledgeware rule or check causing a component to display differently based on the outcome of that rule or check, you won't see the calculated value; just the result of the calculated value. You can see the value returned by a computed attribute in:
G
A report you generate through the Tools - Report Definition dialog. The text displayed in your diagram, after you define a text template using the Insert Link Template dialog. The Edit - Properties dialog, providing the administrator configured them to display as described in Changing the Display Order of Properties.
Description Total length of a "Pipe with bend" object. This includes the computation for all bends. Compares the pipe's bend radius (at each segment) with the bend rule radius. The bend rule radius is derived from the values for the pipe's nominal size, material category and schedule.
PipingBendablePipe
IsBendRadiusConsistent()
PipingBendablePipe
Compares the bending rule mini grip length with the length of each bendable segment. Bending IsMinimumGripLengthConsistent() rule mini grip length is derived from the values for the pipe's nominal size, material category and schedule. NodeBendAngle NodeBendRadius NodeNumber NodeRotationAngle NodeSlopeAngle NodeX Bend angle of a specific node of a run. Bend radius of a specific node of a run. Node number that is generated automatically during route definition. Rotation angle for a specific node on a run. Slope angle for a specific node on a run. Absolute X Coordinate for a specific node on a run. The axis where X is defined by the first two segments (node 1 and node 2) of a bendable. The Y and Z axes are rotated and transformed relative to X. Absolute Y Coordinate for a specific node on a run.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeX_LocalAxis
PipingBendablePipe
NodeY
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 400
PipingBendablePipe
NodeY_LocalAxis
The axis where Y is defined by the first two segments (node 1 and node 2) of a bendable. The X and Z axes are rotated and transformed relative to Y. Absolute Z Coordinate for a specific node on a run. The axis where Z is defined by the first two segments (node 1 and node 2) of a bendable. The X and Y axes are rotated and transformed relative to Z. The length between 2 nodes on a run Total number of hex bolts Diameter of each hex bolts Length of each hex bolt Total number of stud bolts Diameter of each stud bolts Length of each stud bolt Returns a list of the objects that are members of a line, between two selected points. Other piping lines that join the selected line are also included. Total dry weight of an object. This is computed by multiplying the length with the dry weight per unit length. Total wet weight of an object. This is computed by multiplying the length with the Wet weight per unit length. Returns the name of the piping line to which the object belongs. Returns a pointer to the piping line to which the object belongs. Returns the name of the spool to which the object belongs. Checks if the pipe specification attribute of the input piping part function is "in spec." (That is, its pipe specification value is derived from its piping line.) Checks if the input object has the same nominal size as anything connected to it. Checks if the input object has the same pipe specification as anything connected to it. Returns the name of the piping line to which the object belongs. Returns a pointer to the piping line to which the object belongs.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeZ
PipingBendablePipe
NodeZ_LocalAxis
PipingLine
TotalDryWeight
PipingLine
TotalWetWeight
PipingPartFunc
IsInPipeSpec()
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 401
PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc PipingPartFunc
PhysicalEndStyle PhysicalMaterialCategory PhysicalMaterialCode PhysicalOutsideDiameter PhysicalPartCode PhysicalPartName PhysicalRating PhysicalSchedule PhysicalStandard PhysicalWallThickness PhysicalWeightDry PhysicalWeightWet ParentICLoopName ParentICLoopObject
Returns a string describing the endstyle type: threaded, butt-weld, plain-end, raised-face. Material used to create the part: carbon steel, stainless steel, copper, aluminum. Industry standard code that identifies the material used to create the part. The outside diameter of the pipe. Industry standard code that identifies the part. User-assigned name for the part. Industry standard code that describes how much pressure the material can withstand. Industry standard code that describes the wall thickness of the pipe. Industry standard for the part. For example: ASTL, Iron, PVC. Thickness of the material used to create the part. Dry weight of an object. Wet weight of an object. Returns the name of the instrumentation and control loop to which the object belongs. Returns a pointer to the instrumentation and control loop to which the object belongs. Defines the bottom Z elevation of a specific duct. You can use this parameter to label the required elevations while drafting. Compares the actual pipe length with the maximum design length, which is derived from the values for nominal size and material category. Defines the top Z elevation of a specific duct. You can use this parameter to label the required elevations while drafting. Returns true if the input object has the same nominal size as anything connected to it. Returns true if the input object has the same pipe specification as anything is connected to it. Returns the name of the piping line to which the object belongs. Returns a pointer to the piping line to which the object belongs. Returns the name of the piping line to which the object belongs. Returns a pointer to the piping line to which the object belongs.
PipingPipe
BottomElevation
PipingPipe
IsTotalLengthConsistent()
PipingPipe
TopElevation
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 402
PipingSpool
TotalDryWeight
Total dry weight of an object. This is computed by multiplying the length with the dry weight per unit length. Total wet weight of an object. This is computed by multiplying the length with the wet weight per unit length.
PipingSpool
TotalWetWeight
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 403
Customizing
This section describes ways in which you can customize the Piping Design workbench. The task Setting Up the Application describes the various steps you have to take, and the order in which you have to do them, to set up Piping Design.
Customizing Settings (3-D) Setting Up the Application Project Resource Management Feature Dictionary: Creating Classes and Attributes Cache Mode Penetration Management Creating Reports Catalogs Line ID Catalogs Standards and Design Rules Resource Map Using Knowledgeware Checks Defining Options Working with ENOVIA
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 404
Customizing Settings
This section describes the settings that you can access through the Tools - Options command in the menu bar. These settings are stored in permanent setting files and will not be lost when you end your session. Some of these settings affect the looks of the workbench. Others affect the way certain functions behave. Still others are necessary to have access to certain functions. When they are necessary for a function they are also identified in that specific task. 1. Click Tools - Options in the menu bar. The Options dialog box displays. 2. Click Equipment & Systems under the Options heading in the left column. Tab pages become available in the main window. These apply to more than one application.
3.
Not all options in these pages are relevant for all applications. Also available to you are pages listed below the heading Equipment & Systems. These are specific to the applications mentioned.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 405
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 406
ISOGen Setup
The Piping Design heading under Equipment and Systems contains a tab for setting options for generating isometric drawings. You can:
G
View and select directories necessary for the process. Select the units in which values should display.
Directory Structures
The directories needed for generating isometric drawings are noted in the fields above. The fields for Root Directory, Project Directory and Error File are populated by the application. You will need to enter directories for the fields Style Directory and I-Run.exe path. See Creating an Isometric Drawing - Setup Requirements for more information.
Units
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 407
Select the units in which you want values to display in the generated 2-D drawing. Click on the down arrow and make your selection.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 408
2.
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 409
4.
Make any changes you want to the general design rules. This application incorporates intelligent design functions. This means that as you design, the application ensures your designing meets certain criteria. These criteria are established by the design rules. For instance, the compatibility design rules will match the threaded end of a pipe to the threaded end of a part. There are different sets of design rules. Some are specific to a standard. Others are specific to a specifications catalog. And there are still others that apply every time you are placing a part. These last are known as "global" or "general" design rules. Although you cannot add a new design rule to the general design rules, you can modify existing ones; and, you can add attributes for informational purposes to the Design Rules Catalog. Compartment and Access does not use general design rules. Map the functional physical classes. As explained below, this means "mapping" each class to a function. The feature dictionary has both functional and physical classes. A functional class is a more abstract concept - it assigns a function to an object. Functional classes are used mostly in 2-D (schematic) designing, where designers only have to assign a function to objects they place in their designs, without having to specify exactly which physical part goes at that location. In 3-D design you place physical objects, with unique part numbers. But you will use a schematic to assist in creation of 3-D design, which is why you need to link each physical class to a function. That is what is meant by mapping the functional physical classes. As an example, the physical subclasses butterfly valve and globe valve are mapped to the throttle valve function, whereas the subclass diaphragm actuator is mapped to the valve operator function. You add these mappings in a mapping table. The application has one table that is global or general in nature. In addition, each specifications catalog has a separate mapping table. For this step you only need to map the general mapping table. Raceway & Conduit Design, Hanger Design and Compartment and Access do not have functional physical mapping tables. Create your standards. A sample standard is provided with this application but almost all users will be creating one or more standards. The simplest explanation of a standard is that it is a collection of specifications. You use a standard because it ensures that all the parts you place, and the manner in which you place them, will meet certain minimum requirements or their attributes will be within a certain range. The specifications themselves apply to many different properties, such as material or pressure ranges, maximum bend angles, maximum or minimum length, etc. As an example, if you define your standard by material, then the list of allowable nominal sizes for stainless steel will be different than the sizes for carbon steel. When you create a standard you should also create design rules specific to that standard. HVAC Design, Hanger Design and Compartment and Access do not have standard-related design rules.
5.
6.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 410
7.
Build parts and create a master catalog. You will need to build the parts you intend to use and place them in a master catalog. During actual use, the parts available to you will depend on the standard and specifications you are using. When you modify the catalog (the most common occurrence is adding a new part) you must synchronize the specifications catalog. This is done by resolving the queries associated with the part type family. Create the specifications catalog(s). A specifications catalog allows you to specify which parts can be used for a certain project or part of a project. A specifications catalog allows you to further refine the choices available in a parts catalog. If you are building a system for conveying hot gases under pressure, for instance, you will only want to use pipes and parts that have a certain heat tolerance, are made of certain materials and have a certain pressure rating. You achieve this by defining in the specifications catalog what the properties should be for the parts you want to use. When you place parts using the specifications catalog, you will only be able to use parts from the main catalog that meet the criteria you have defined in that specifications catalog. You should synchronize the specification catalog whenever you modify the master catalog (the most common occurrence is adding a new part). This is done by resolving the queries associated with the part type family.
8.
When you create a specifications catalog you should also create design rules for that specifications catalog, such as welding rules, turning rules, etc. You should also define the functional physical mapping table for the specifications catalog. Raceway & Conduit Design, Hanger Design and Compartment and Access do not have specifications-related design rules or functional physical mapping tables. Do not forget to enter the names and locations of the resources you just created in the project resource management file.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 411
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 412
Note that when the dialog box opens the last project that you used is selected. The Select tab lists all the XML projects setup found in the directory defined by the environment variable CATDisciplinePath. This list begins with a CNEXT project which contains only the applications with their resources as defined and delivered with CNEXT. 2. Select the project of your choice, here Project. The corresponding PRM file is read and the disciplines it contains are listed. 3. Select the corresponding discipline, here Piping. Click OK to use the project and discipline you have selected.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 413
4. The following step is used for informational purposes only - to see a list of resources for a particular discipline. To select a project you only need to take the steps explained above. Select the Browse tab. Once a project and a discipline have been selected, the dialog box lists all the applications defined for the chosen discipline, the description of the active application, and the list of resources of that application. The list of resources displayed is always that for the active application. You should also note that the applications displayed include the applications under that particular discipline, and any applications that are at the project level, which means above the discipline in the PRM hierarchy. In the example below, the Piping discipline displays Piping Design and PID, which are part of that discipline. It also displays the Equipment, Hanger Design and Penetration Management applications, because some of their resources have been placed at the project level. The reason for placing them at the project level is that most disciplines make use of these applications.
When the Project Resource Management dialog box first displays, as explained in Step 1, it may contain a third tab - XML Parsing Error. This indicates that there is an XML syntax error in the file that corresponds to the Project you have chosen.
Click the XML Parsing Error tab to display the error, as shown in the image below.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 414
You will need to correct the PRM file to get rid of the error. Errors in defining resources in the PRM file are explained in Checking a PRM File for Errors.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 415
If you have more than one project resource management file then by default the application will start with the file named Project.xml, if there is such a file, or the last file used. If you wish to select another resource management file you must open it by clicking Tools - Project Management. Go to the Select tab and select the file and discipline you need. This dialog box shows each resource available to you, unless the value of "Visible" (see below) against a resource or application is set to No. 2.The resource management file is organized into several sections to make it easier to manage and utilize resources. The image below shows its hierarchical structure, with an exception, which is explained below. "Other disciplines" refers to other disciplines like Tubing, or AEC V4 to V5 Migration Discipline, that are placed at the same level. They are not shown in this image for reasons of space.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 416
The Project box refers to the project for which the PRM file has been created, and will frequently be identified by the file name. In this case it is Project.xml. When you look at the Project.xml file you will see that the resource listings begin with project resources. Any resources you place under the heading Project Resources can be used by all applications that are included in the file. In the sample file you will see items like zones, feature dictionary and application-generated object names in this section. All disciplines and applications shown under project resources will be able to access the resources identified under the heading project resources. The next level is the discipline level. All resources placed under a discipline, such as Piping, can be used by all the applications which are listed under it. In the example above, Piping Diagrams, Piping Design and Equipment applications are shown under the Piping Discipline. Resources such as various catalogs and report definitions are listed at the discipline level and can be accessed by all applications that belong to that discipline. The next level of resource management is the application itself. Any resource referred to at this level can only be used by that application. Resources like catalogs, files that contain connector attributes and resolved parts directories are listed at this level. Equipment Arrangement and Hanger Design have been placed under several disciplines. These applications are considered multi-discipline because their resources are used by all disciplines. When you are working in these disciplines you may need Equipment or Hanger resources. However, in different disciplines you may not use the same resources from Equipment Arrangement or Hanger Design and this structuring allows you to place different different resources under each discipline. For instance, under the Piping Discipline, Equipment Arrangement may have a different catalog (with Piping related equipment only) than under the HVAC Discipline.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 417
Equipment and Hanger applications have also been placed at the project resource level, primarily to allow sharing of resources, under the headings "Equipment Application Resources" and "Hanger Design Application Resources." To explain: If you are working in Piping Design you are in the Piping Discipline. You select the discipline by clicking Tools - Project Management, or simply by opening an application, which will activate the correct discipline. For this to happen your PRM file must be set up correctly. Now, while in the piping workbench, you want to place equipment in your document, and you launch Equipment Arrangement. When you do so you will only have access to equipment resources that are identified in the PRM file under the piping discipline, for instance the "piping equipment catalog," containing piping related equipment. But let us assume that in your project you have certain types of equipment that are used by all disciplines. You can create a catalog that contains all this common equipment and identify it under "Equipment Application Resources" at the project level (it should not be identified under discipline also). When you do this you will have access to this catalog when you open Equipment Arrangement under any discipline. Some applications have the entry "Visible = yes". If you set the value to No then this application cannot be used and will not be visible in the Tools - Project Management dialog box. 3. A resource entry looks like this:
<Resource Name="PipingIDSchema" Description="Piping ID Schema Directory"> <ID Type="Path" Driver="File" Location="..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\DataDictionary"/> </Resource>
G
You should not change the Resource Name, even if you replace a resource with a different one. You can change the Description if you want to - this is a brief explanation of the resource. The Type field refers to file type. If the Type field says Catia, it refers to a file type unique to Catia, such as .catalog. The type Misc is used for resources which are of a type not unique to Catia and must be opened in another way. The type Path is similar, except that in the Location field only the directory in which the resource is located is named. If your resources do not reside in Enovia, enter File in the Driver field. Define the Location field as follows: As shown in the resource example above, the location entry is relative - it is relative to the entry you made in the Environment Editor as shown in Step 1. The entry in the location field will be added to the entry you had in the Environment Editor and it is in that location that the application will look for the resource. Which is why it is preferable to enter absolute paths - including the drive letter - in the location field. If your resources are Enovia-based, enter EnoviaV5 in the Driver field. For Enovia-based resources, all you need to enter in the Location field is the file name of the resource without the file extension. For instance, the catalog PipingParts.catalog would be entered as PipingParts. The Location field usually gives the location of the resource. If this is a directory path then you can change the location, with an associated change in the PRM file. This entry is sometimes used to enter a value for a flag or behavior, such as 0 or 1, or True and False. Some resources have the entry "Visible = yes". If you set the value to No then this resource cannot be used and will not be visible in the Tools - Project Management dialog box. Some resources have the entry Access="RW" or "R". These refers to file permissions: read-write or read.
When you change from using file-based resources to Enovia-based resources: You must go through the PRM file and change the "Driver" and "Location" entries as noted above. This must be done for all resources that
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 418
have been placed in the Enovia database. 4.The Project Resources listed in the sample Project.xml file are described in following sections, beginning with the resources referred to under Project Resources: G ID schema resources: The "location" lists the directory where the rules for naming objects are stored. Use the default location provided in the sample file. You need to have this for every application you use. In addition, there is an entry for "MultiDisciplineIDSchema." This location is used for objects -such as zones that are used by all disciplines.
G
User dictionary resources: In the location field enter the name of the CATfct file for each application. You do not need to enter the location. The CATfct file is used to store all the classes and attributes created by you. The default names for CATfct files in each application are included in the sample project.xml file and you should use these names unless you have created a different CATfct file, or changed the default name. There is also a MultiDisciplineUserDictionary - this CATfct file can be referred to by all applications. Zones catalog: The zones that you create need to be stored in a catalog accessible to all users, because they are shared. The default location is CATMldZone.catalog. Even though zones are only created in schematic applications, other applications may use them when documents are moved from schematic to 3D. Enter a different name or location if you change them. Discrete values: Many attributes have discrete values and this directory is used to store them. Schematic driven: This is a flag that needs to be set for schematic driven routing and parts placement. If the value of "Location" is set to 0 then individual users can check or uncheck an option that allows schematic driven 3D design. If the value is set to 1 then the option "schematic driven" is always selected and users cannot uncheck it. (In Equipment Arrangement, schematic driven parts placement is not possible if the Function Driven flag is set to 2.) Delete Part On Run: This entry is used to control whether all parts on a run will be deleted when you delete the run. If you enter the value of "Location" as 1 then the parts will be deleted. If you enter the value 0 then the parts will not be deleted when you delete the run. Graphic representations: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in which to store the categories (single, double, etc.). That file is created within an application, as you will see later. There is also a file under Project Resources because the categories must be available to all applications. If you add a new category you must include it in this file too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. Penetration openings catalog: The profiles of the holes you may want to make through walls and partitions to pass pipes and ducts are noted in this catalog. If you make a new profile you must enter it here too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. ID Sequence Number directory: The IDSequenceNumbers directory contains the last sequence number that was generated for an object. You should specify a location for it. Importer CATfcts: This lists the location of your CATfct files, and is used when migrating V4 models to V5. If you change the location of the CATfct files you must enter the new location in the "Location" field. You do not need to do anything if you continue to use the default location. Reference Grid System: Location of the CATPart that contains the reference grid definition used by applications. You need to modify this entry if you change the location of the CATPart or rename it. Discipline super class: This is a text file that lists the object classes that will be visible in a class browser when you are in the Equipment Arrangement workbench. You can have files at project, discipline and application level. The filter will only work with a user-generated PRM file. Computed attributes: This entry shows the location of the ComputedAttributes.txt file. The computed attributes contained in this file will display in the Properties dialog box. You can change the location of this file, and update the PRM file accordingly. You can also change the entries in the file. Unique reference part number options & partially resolved reference part number options: These two entries define how a placed part will be named. 'Unique reference' parts are those that have at least one property (or all properties) that can have infinite values. An HVAC duct is an example. 'Partially resolved' parts are those in which the values of all properties are defined by a design table. Valves are an example. In this entry, if you enter 1 in the Location field then the name of the placed part will be derived from the design table. If you enter 2 then the name will be derived from the object naming rules. Publication Based Connections: This entry controls whether publication based connections will be used
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 419
when establishing connections between elements in different work packages. When this flag is on (the value in the Location field is 1), the system will use publication based link technology. This link technology is intended to improve support for configuration management, revision management and concurrent engineering. When working in an ENOVIA environment, publication based connections are used for all cross document connections, regardless of the setting of this resource. 5.The next level, as explained above, is the Discipline level. Resources placed under the Discipline category can be used by all the applications in that discipline. The sample Project.xml file places the following resources at the Discipline level. Each entry names the file and gives its default location. If you intend to use different resources, which is likely, then you must enter the new file name and location, as appropriate. The following resources are referenced, but not all disciplines will have all of these resources.
G
Specifications catalog Insulation specifications catalog Material specifications catalog Standards catalog Design rules: You need to use the default location and file name Parts catalog name and location: contains parametric parts Piping lines shared catalog: The file where shared piping lines are stored and its location. Sample data directory: This is the location where the reports you run will be stored. Report definitions directory: The formats (definitions) you create for running reports are stored in this directory.
6.In addition to resources placed at the Project and Discipline levels, resources are also placed at the application level and are only available to the application under which they are placed. 2-D applications have all or most of the following resources. G Component catalog: The parts catalog.
G
Shared instrument lines catalog. Annotation catalog. Sample data directory: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in which to store the categories (open, closed, etc.). If you add a new category you must include it in this file too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. Design rules for Equipment Arrangement: This is used when assigning a part type to a 2D part. The parts catalog for Equipment Arrangement: This is used when assigning a part type to a 2D part.
Graphic representations file: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in which to store the categories (single, double, etc.). If you add a new category you must include it in this file too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. Connector attributes file: This file lists the attributes that will be inherited (from the part) by a connector when you are placing it on a part. If you want to make changes to the attributes you want a connector to inherit you must do it in this file. Do not change the name of this file. Resolved parts: When you place a parametric part in a document it assumes specific dimensions. Once a part has specific dimensions it is placed in the Resolved Parts catalog. The location of the default Resolved Parts catalog is listed here. Design rules: You need to use the default location and file name.
Piping Design
G
Version 5 Release 16
Page 420
Parts catalog name and location: contains parametric parts Report definitions directory: The formats (definitions) you create for running reports are stored in this directory. Graphic 2D Symbols Catalog: For Piping, this is the catalog in which the 2-D equivalents of 3-D endstyles are stored. For Equipment, this catalog contains 2-D symbols for center of gravity. See Drawing Production for more information. Growth Factor: Some applications allow you to reserve space in some parts for future growth. You can, for instance, reserve space in a conduit for future growth. The space saved for future growth will be equal to the value you enter in the "Location" field. If you enter 0.2 it means that 20 percent of the space in a conduit will be reserved for future growth and you will only be allowed to use 80 percent of the space in it. Function Driven: This is a flag that controls parts placement in Equipment Arrangement. The value in the Location field dictates: 1 - Function driven equipment placement is possible; 2 - Only functionless equipment placement is possible. (Schematic driven parts placement is not possible in Equipment Arrangement.); 3 - Both function driven and functionless equipment placement are possible (a final Tools Options setting is needed. See Functionless Parts Placement in Equipment Arrangement documentation.) Hanger Cable Clearance: The value in the Location field is the cable clearance, in millimeters. This value plus the diameter of the cable you are routing must be less than the tier spacing of the hanger. The cable clearance value is assigned when a hanger is placed. HVAC Up Direction: The value in the Location field determines the 'Up' direction of a part that is placed on a run. There are two numerals in this field - the first dictates the up direction for a part placed on a horizontal run, the second is for a vertical run. Thus, if the value is 00, the Up direction will the same for both horizontal and vertical runs. The values are: 0 - follow the run's Up Direction; 1 - Up direction will follow the X axis; 2 - follow Y axis; 3 - follow Z axis.
7.The AEC Migration Discipline refers to a product that enables you to migrate V4 models to V5. It has Piping Design, Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams, Equipment Arrangement, Tubing Design and HVAC Design resources under it. Most resources have been described above and do not need further explanation. Enter the location and file names if they are different from those in the sample Project.xml file. In addition, under the heading AEC V4 V5 Migration there are several options you should know about. They are explained below. AEC V4 V5 Migration There are several options that you need to set to True or False. The first several are about migrating data to Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams, Piping Design, Equipment Arrangement, Tubing Design and HVAC Design and Structures. If a V4 model has data of all these types, but you have set two of them to False, then you will only receive V5 data relating to the applications set to True. If you want data of all types to be migrated then you must set all the options to True. Other options are:
G
Create runs without parts: If set to True a run will be migrated without the parts. ImportPipingLine (or other type of line): If set to True a line will be created in the V5 Piping Line catalog if it does not exist. When set to False, the migration process will stop if the line does not exist in V5. Mapping Table: You need to enter the location and name of the migration mapping table if you change the default name or location. MigratedPIDNoShowSheetFormat: The sheet format (also known as title block) will not be visible if the value of "Location" is set to False. MigrateXXXWithMissingLines: If set to True the sheet will be migrated even if some Lines cannot be. If set
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 421
to False the migration process will stop if missing lines are encountered.
G
MigratedXXXSheetSize: Enter the size in the Location field: Letter, Legal, A0, ISO/A1, ISO/A2, ISO/A3, ISO/A4, ISO/A, ANSI/B, ANSI/C, ANSI/D, ANSI/E, ANSI/F, ANSI).
8.In addition to some of the resources explained above, the Structure Discipline includes the following resources or entries: G Sections catalog: If you change the default location of the AISC_BigScale catalog then enter the location in this entry. The location should include the directory AISC in which the catalog should reside, so that the path reads: ......AISC\AISC_BigScale.catalog.
G
Structure sections path: The path of the directory in which the available resolved sections are stored. The default location is ...startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Structure\StructuralCatalogs\ModelsResolved. Structure Thickness List: This is the location of the thickness list sample file, which contains the list of thicknesses that can be applied to a plate. Structure openings catalog: Location of the openings parts catalog. Structure materials catalog: Location of the structure materials catalog. Structure detail design: Location of the catalog that contains user defined features. Naming section characteristics: Location of the NLS file that lists names of sections whose names should not be changed. This is for internal use. Do not change anything in this entry. Structure Functional Connections Catalog: Location of the Structure Functional Connections Catalog. This catalog contains the names of connection types between objects. Project Bounding Box: This specifies the dimensions of your project - if you are designing a ship then it will be set within these dimensions. You can define the unit used for measuring - the default is millimeter - and change the default values for each direction. The values are measured from the origin (000).
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 422
2. Select a Project, Discipline and Application as necessary. If you select ALL in the Discipline and Application fields then the entire project resource management file will be checked (required and optional resources only). 3. Click Apply after you have made your selection. The dialog box will display the resources that have errors. The errors are explained below. G If there are no errors then a message will state that all required - or optional - resources are okay, in the Status column.
G
Select a resource to see more information about the error in the Selected Resource field below. Click on the column headings to sort by that heading. A Y in the Required column shows if a resource is required. No entry means it is an optional resource.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 423
4. The errors are explained below. Also see the PRM task for more information. G Resource definition has incorrect type: The value of the 'Type' field in the resource's PRM entry is incorrect. The Type field refers to file type. See the PRM task for more information.
G
Resource not found in the project management xml file: There is no entry for the resource in the PRM file. Resource Data not found: The file or directory corresponding to the resource cannot be found at the location defined in the PRM file. Access specified for location for resource is not correct: Some entries have a field called 'Access'. This refers to the permissions set for the file corresponding to the resource. One common error is that some files need to have access set to RW (read-write) and not R (read only).
5. You can save the report. Click the Export button and enter a file name and location in the Save dialog box that displays. The file must be saved in .htm format.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 424
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 425
4.
You can enter more than one alias name in the Location field for a resource. For instance, using the example given above, you can enter the following: "${Startup_Directory}\${MultiDiscSample}\EquipmentComputedAttributes.txt" in which case the application will look for the directories defined under the two alias names (..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\MultiDiscipline\SampleData) followed by the file name (EquipmentComputedAttributes.txt). You also have the ability to add the Path field to a resource. This is a matter of choice and provides the same functionality as using the Location field only. In the following example, both Location and Path fields are used: Location="EquipmentComputedAttributes.txt" Path="${Startup_Directory}\${MultiDiscSample}"/> The application will read it as ..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\MultiDiscipline\SampleData\ EquipmentComputedAttributes.txt. Instead of adding the alias names to a PRM file, as explained in Steps 1 & 2, you can add an environment variable to your environment file. To use the same example given in Step 2 above, you would add the following line in the environment file: set Startup_Directory=..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\ You can use an absolute path also. You then need to replace the value of the Location fields in the PRM file, as explained in Step 3 above. The application uses the following order to determine if an alias is used:
G
5.
6.
The environment file. The project resource management file. The application management resource file.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 426
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 427
discipline and application level. The filter will only work with a user-generated PRM file. Discrete values: Many attributes have discrete values and this directory is used to store them. Equip Design Rules Catalog: This is used by 2D applications when assigning a part type to a 2D part. Equip Parts Catalog: This is used by 2D applications when assigning a part type to a 2D part. Function Driven: This is a flag that controls parts placement in Equipment Arrangement. The value in the Location field dictates: 1 - Function driven equipment placement is possible; 2 - Only functionless equipment placement is possible. (Schematic driven parts placement is not possible in Equipment Arrangement.); 3 - Both function driven and functionless equipment placement are possible (a final Tools - Options setting is needed. See Functionless Parts Placement in Equipment Arrangement documentation.) Graphic 2D Symbols Catalog: For Piping, this is the catalog in which the 2-D equivalents of 3-D endstyles are stored. For Equipment, this catalog contains 2-D symbols for center of gravity. See Drawing Production for more information. Graphic Representations: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in which to store the categories (single, double, etc.). That file is created within an application, as you will see later. There is also a file under Project Resources because the categories must be available to all applications. If you add a new category you must include it in this file too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. Growth Factor: Some applications allow you to reserve space in some parts for future growth. You can, for instance, reserve space in a conduit for future growth. The space saved for future growth will be equal to the value you enter in the "Location" field. If you enter 0.2 it means that 20 percent of the space in a conduit will be reserved for future growth and you will only be allowed to use 80 percent of the space in it. Hanger Cable Clearance: The value in the Location field is the cable clearance, in millimeters. This value plus the diameter of the cable you are routing must be less than the tier spacing of the hanger. The cable clearance value is assigned when a hanger is placed. HVAC Up Direction: The value in the Location field determines the 'Up' direction of a part that is placed on a run. There are two numerals in this field - the first dictates the up direction for a part placed on a horizontal run, the second is for a vertical run. Thus, if the value is 00, the Up direction will the same for both horizontal and vertical runs. The values are: 0 - follow the run's Up Direction; 1 - Up direction will follow the X axis; 2 - follow Y axis; 3 - follow Z axis. ID Schema Resources: The "location" lists the directory where the rules for naming objects are stored. Use the default location provided in the sample file. You need to have this for every application you use. In addition, there is an entry for "MultiDisciplineIDSchema." This location is used for objects -such as zones - that are used by all disciplines. ID Sequence Number: The IDSequenceNumber directory contains the last sequence number that was generated for an object. You should specify a location for it. Import...: Usually followed by a type of line, such as Piping Line. Used when migrating V4 data to V5. If set to True a line will be created in the V5 Piping Line catalog if it does not exist. When set to
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 428
False, the migration process will stop if the line does not exist in V5. Importer CATfcts: This lists the location of your CATfct files, and is used when migrating V4 models to V5. If you change the location of the CATfct files you must enter the new location in the "Location" field. You do not need to do anything if you continue to use the default location. Instrument Line Attribute Filter: A file that defines the list of instrumentation related attributes used to filter the Instrument Line ID selection list. Instrument Lines Catalog: The file where shared instrument lines (line IDs) are stored. Insulation Spec Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name, such as HVAC. If you intend to use different resources, which is likely, then you must enter the new file name and location, as appropriate. Line ID Attribute Filter: A file that defines the list of attributes used to filter the application Line ID selection list. Lines Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name. The file where shared lines (line IDs) are stored. Material Management Mode: The value of the Location field determines the default state of the option Show Preferred List Only in Material & Orientation dialogs. None: The option displays in its last opened state. ActiveUnSpec: The option is unselected. ActiveSpec: The option is selected. Material Spec Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name, such as HVAC. If you intend to use different resources, which is likely, then you must enter the new file name and location, as appropriate. Migrate...: Usually followed by an application name. This option is used when migrating V4 data to V5. Set the value of Location to True if you want data of this type to be migrated into your V5 document. Set it to False if you do not want it migrated. Migration Mapping Table: The migration mapping table maps V4 classes and attributes to V5. There are other mapping tables specific to applications, such as Tubing Migration Mapping Table, which maps V4 tubing detail names to V5, and Structures Migration Mapping Table, which maps structures names from V4 to V5. Migrated PID No Show Sheet Format: The sheet format (also known as title block) will not be visible if the value of "Location" is set to False. Migrated XXX Sheet Size: XXX is an application name, such as PID. Enter the size in the Location field - Letter, Legal, A0, ISO/A1, ISO/A2, ISO/A3, ISO/A4, ISO/A, ANSI/B, ANSI/C, ANSI/D, ANSI/E, ANSI/F, ANSI). Migrate XXX With Missing Lines: XXX is an application name, such as PID. If set to True the sheet will be migrated even if some Lines cannot be. If set to False the migration process will stop if missing lines are encountered. Molded Conventions: Location of a file that contains the rules defining molded conventions for
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 429
structural objects. Naming Section Characteristics: Location of the NLS file that lists names of sections whose names should not be changed. This is for internal use. Do not change anything in this entry. Offsheets Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name, such as PID. The catalog of offsheet symbols to be used in a schematic diagram. Orientation Naming Convention: This is a variable that defines the ship coordinate system, whether it is American or European. For American convention enter the following in the Location field: CATStrOrientNamingUSAConv. Partially resolved reference part number options & unique reference part number options: These two entries define how a placed part will be named. 'Unique reference' parts are those that have at least one property (or all properties) that can have infinite values. An HVAC duct is an example. 'Partially resolved' parts are those in which the values of all properties are defined by a design table. Valves are an example. In this entry, if you enter 1 in the Location field then the name of the placed part will be derived from the design table. If you enter 2 then the name will be derived from the object naming rules. Parts Catalog: The parts catalog for 3D applications, e.g. PipingPartsCatalog or TubingPartsCatalog. Contains parametric parts. If you intend to use different resources, which is likely, then you must enter the new file name and location, as appropriate. Penetration Openings Catalog: The profiles of the holes you may want to make through walls and partitions to pass pipes and ducts are noted in this catalog. If you make a new profile you must enter it here too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them. Project Envelope: (Bounding Box) Location of a file that specifies the dimensions of your project if you are designing a ship then it will be set within these dimensions. You can define the unit used for measuring - the default is millimeter - and change the default values for each direction. The values are measured from the origin (000). Project Parameters: Location of a file that defines a ship's coordinate system. Project Reference Planes: Location of a file that contains defined project reference planes used in some Structures applications. Publication Based Connections: This entry controls whether publication based connections will be used when establishing connections between elements in different work packages. When this flag is on (the value in the Location field is 1), the system will use publication based link technology. This link technology is intended to improve support for configuration management, revision management and concurrent engineering. When working in an ENOVIA environment, publication based connections are used for all cross document connections, regardless of the setting of this resource. Reference Grid System: Location of the CATPart that contains the reference grid definition used by applications. You need to modify this entry if you change the location of the CATPart or rename it. Report Definitions: Usually preceded by an application name, such as Hanger. The formats (definitions) you create for running reports are stored in this directory.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 430
Resolved XXX Parts: (XXX is an application name.) When you place a parametric part in a document it assumes specific dimensions. Once a part has specific dimensions it is placed in the Resolved Parts catalog. The location of the default Resolved Parts catalog is listed here. Schematic Driven: This is a flag that needs to be set for schematic driven routing and parts placement. If the value of "Location" is set to 0 then individual users can check or uncheck an option that allows schematic driven 3D design. If the value is set to 1 then the option "schematic driven" is always selected and users cannot uncheck it. (In Equipment Arrangement, schematic driven parts placement is not possible if the Function Driven flag is set to 2.) Specifications Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name, such as Piping. If you intend to use different resources, which is likely, then you must enter the new file name and location, as appropriate. Standards Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name, such as Piping. If you intend to use different resources, which is likely, then you must enter the new file name and location, as appropriate.
StrFuncDesignUserDictionary: Location of the CATfct file used by Structure Functional Design and Ship Structure Detail Design.
Structure Detail Design Catalog: Location of the catalog that contains user defined features. Structure Drawing Symbols Catalog: Location of the catalog that contains the 2D symbols used in the drawing production function. Structure Functional Connections Catalog: Location of the Structure Functional Connections Catalog. This catalog contains the names of connection types between objects. Structure Hull Model: The location of the CATpart that contains the hull you want to use in your ship design. This hull feature will automatically be loaded when you create a system. Structure Hull Feature Name: The name of the hull feature defined in the CATpart document that is specified in the PRM resource 'Structure Hull Model'. Structure Materials Catalog: Location of the structure materials catalog. Structure Openings Catalog: Location of the openings parts catalog. Structure Sections Catalog: If you change the default location of the AISC_BigScale catalog then enter the location in this entry. The location should include the directory AISC in which the catalog should reside, so that the path reads: ......AISC\AISC_BigScale.catalog. Structure Sections Path: The path of the directory in which the available sections are stored. The default location is ...startup\components\StructuralCatalogs\ModelsResolved. Structure Thickness List: This is the location of the thickness list sample file, which contains the list of thicknesses that can be applied to a plate. Unique reference part number options & partially resolved reference part number options:
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 431
These two entries define how a placed part will be named. 'Unique reference' parts are those that have at least one property (or all properties) that can have infinite values. An HVAC duct is an example. 'Partially resolved' parts are those in which the values of all properties are defined by a design table. Valves are an example. In this entry, if you enter 1 in the Location field then the name of the placed part will be derived from the design table. If you enter 2 then the name will be derived from the object naming rules. User Dictionary: Usually preceded by an application name. In the location field enter the name of the CATfct file for each application. You do not need to enter the location. The CATfct file is used to store all the classes and attributes created by you. The default names for CATfct files in each application are included in the sample project.xml file and you should use these names unless you have created a different CATfct file, or changed the default name. There is also a MultiDisciplineUserDictionary - this CATfct file can be referred to by all applications. Zones Catalog: The zones that you create need to be stored in a catalog accessible to all users, because they are shared. The default location is CATMldZone.catalog. Even though zones are only created in schematic applications, other applications may use them when documents are moved from schematic to 3D. Enter a different name or location if you change them.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 432
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 433
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 434
3. Click the Edit Table button. The Piping-FunctionPhysicalMapping.txt file will open in Notepad. You can now add, delete and modify entries in the table. 4. Start on a new line at the bottom of the table and enter NewSubclassFunction in the Function Name column. Note: The column headings in the .txt file are Function Name and Physical Part and represent the columns Function and Part Type, respectively, in the design table. You must enter 'internal' function and part type names. To obtain the internal names open the feature dictionary in the feature dictionary editor and click the Generate Report button. Specify a location for the file. In the report, the name shown against 'Object Key' - under each function or part type - is the internal name that you need to use. 5. Use the tab key to separate the columns. In the PhysicalPart column, enter NewSubclassPhysical. File and Save the txt file. 6. Now when you reopen the FunctionPhysicalMapping Design Table, the new line is added.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 435
PipingValve = "Piping Valve"; PipingPipeFunc = "Pipe Function"; PipingPartFunc = "Piping Part Function";
If you create a new CATNls file you have to follow a naming convention so that the application can recognize it. If your feature dictionary is named CATPipinguser, then the CATNls file must have the name CATPipinguserNLS with the extension CATNls. Thus the file would be named CATPipinguserNLS.CATNls. All CATNls files must be stored in the directory ...intel_a\resources\msgcatalog. CHANGING BASIC CLASS NAMES: Basic class names are those that you see when you create a new feature dictionary. These classes are stored in a .feat file, which in turn is linked to a CATNls file. Feat files must be located in the directory ...intel_a\resources\graphic. The Piping Design file, for instance, is named CATPiping.feat. The corresponding CATNls file is in the directory ...intel_a\resources\msgcatalog. In the case of Piping Design the file is named CATPipingNLS.CATNls. The format of the file is as described above, and you need to change it in a similar manner. CHANGING ATTRIBUTE NAMES: All attribute names are contained in the file CATPlantShipModelerAttrNLS.CATNls, which is in the directory ...intel_a\resources\msgcatalog. You cannot create a new file for attributes - you must use the existing file. Enter a name using the conventions described above.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 436
Extreme caution must be used in changing names because all documents linked to them will be affected. It is recommended that the basic class names not be changed. For the same reason you should not delete attributes and classes.
Piping Design
This task shows how to compare the classes and attributes in two feature dictionaries. A separate task allows you to import classes and attributes from one feature dictionary into another. This task allows you to compare the classes and attributes in one feature dictionary to those in a second one. There can be several uses for this function, one of them being importing the classes and attributes that a subcontractor has added to a feature dictionary into the feature dictionary maintained by the main contractor. Your goal is to have a mapping table that shows the classes and attributes in the feature dictionary you want to import and the classes and attributes in the feature dictionary you are comparing against. This is done by a tool developed for the purpose. Before you run this tool you must "export" both feature dictionaries, explained elsewhere. Exporting them converts them into XML format, which is needed to compare the two. Once you have exported them and run the comparing tool (called comparator) you will get three files which tell you: which classes have problems (do not exist in the mapping table or the XML file of your feature dictionary), which classes need to be added to your feature dictionary and an overall report of what the tool has performed. Before you begin this process you must set the directory path - this tells the tool the directory path in your installation.
G
In Windows, open a command prompt and press Enter after typing: set AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH= XXX\MigrationDirectory where XXX is the directory path to your installation. In Unix: export AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH= XXX/MigrationDirectory where XXX is the directory path to your installation. The user can check the current path by executing the comparator, or executing CATAecDictionaryComparator -h. The comparator will show the path as the first line of output.
1.Export your own feature dictionary (Dictionary_B) and the feature dictionary you want to compare against (Dictionary_A). The process is explained in Exporting the V5 Feature Dictionaries. 1.To run the tool enter the following at a DOS prompt: CATAecDictionaryComparator -i (Dictionary_A) (Dictionary_B) -m (name of mapping table) -o (name for output) -V5 Where:
G
(Dictionary_A) is the XML file which contains the classes and attributes from the feature dictionary you are comparing against. It must include the XML extension. (Dictionary_B) is the XML file which contains classes and attributes from your feature dictionary. It must include the XML extension. (name of mapping table) is the name of the mapping table against which you want to compare. If you do not have a mapping table create an empty workbook using MS Excel, with a .csv extension. Enter the file name in this field - include the .csv extension. The mapping table should be in the following directory: intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\Dictionary\Mapping Table. (name for output) is the name for the three output files. If you enter the name MAR, for instance, then three files will be produced: MAR.html, MAR.xml and MAR.csv.
An entry may look like this: CATAecDictionaryComparator -i Dictionary_A.xml Dictionary_B.xml -m V5toV5ObjectMapping.csv -o MAR
2.When the tool (called Comparator) has finished running it will directories: 438 XML and CSV files in Version 5 produce Releasethree 16 reports and place them in the followingPage Piping Design intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\Dictionary\DDL_Files and the HTML file in ...\Reports.
Open the HTML file in a Web browser to see a full report. The report begins with a table of contents that is hyperlinked to the entries. (The names in parentheses are internal names.) The entries in the report are color coded as follows:
G
Green: No action was taken. The class appears in the mapping table and the XML file of V5 classes. Blue: The class appears in the mapping table, but not in the XML file of your feature dictionary (Dictionary_B. Red: The class was not found in the mapping table or XML file of your feature dictionary (Dictionary_B). Orange: Mapping does not exist in the mapping table ("no mapping"), or is badly mapped.
3.Open the XML file (using a text editor like Wordpad) to see a of the classes that do not exist in your feature dictionary and can be imported. Page 439 Version 5list Release 16 Piping Design <Class Name="PipingPartFunc" DisplayName="Piping Part Function" Superclass="Component_Function" Creator="System" Domain="PIP" UUID="b7acacd1_83_3a707981_10"> 4.Open the CSV file using Microsoft Excel. It will look similar to the image below.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 440
In the first three columns this table displays classes in the feature dictionary you are comparing against - Dictionary_B. You should fill in the 4th, 5th and 6th columns with whatever you want the corresponding entry to be in your feature dictionary - Dictionary_A. In column 7 you should enter the domain, or application. (PIP=Piping Design, PID= Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams, EQT= Equipment Design, HVA=HVAC Design, etc.) An asterisk in the Attribute column indicates that the entry is a class. If it has attributes then the lines that follow it will list the attributes under the same class name. In the example above, Line 2 shows a class. Lines 3, 4 and 5 show that the entries are attributes of the class Piping Line and are called Size, Part Description and Design Speed. NOTE: Entries should refer to the internal name of the class or parent. The internal name is the name within the application and is not the one the user sees. Frequently it is similar, though, and the class name Piping Line may have the internal name PipingLine. You can find the internal name by looking at the XML file, where it's referred to as Name and Superclass. 5.Once you have entered the information you need to copy and paste it into the mapping table - in the current example it is V5ToV5ObjectMapping.csv.
5.If Dictionary_A has classes and attributes that do not have equivalent classes and attributes in Dictionary_B then you must repeat the steps explained in Importing the XML Output. You can repeat these steps as many times as you want - until you are satisfied that your mapping table shows all the classes and attributes you want from Dictionary_A and their corresponding Dictionary_B classes and attributes. 5.Import the classes and attributes that do not exist in your feature dictionary (Dictionary_B) by using the process explained in Importing the XML Output.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 441
4. Right click on the product (in this case test.CATProduct) and, in the drop down menu that displays, select CATDUAV5. The CATDUA V5 dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 442
5. This dialog box allows you to both check the file for errors, and clean it if necessary. To check the file: G Select Long or Short message in the drop down box.
G
6. Click the file (test.CATProduct) to see the report. The error "backup startup is not declared" means the document has not been cleaned. 7. To clean the document, select Open html output file and Clean and click Run. The document will be cleaned and a report generated. For more information about the process see the Infrastructure User's Guide - Using the Data Upward Assistant.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 443
Cache Mode
This section discusses ways in which you can design efficiently in cache mode, as well as tips about using it. Working in Cache Mode
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 444
2.
3.
Wireframe geometry, such as the sections on trapeze hangers, are not visible in cache mode, which also means they cannot be selected. If you want to be able to see them in cache mode then check the option Save Lineic Elements in CGR. You can find it in Tools - Options - Infrastructure - Product Structure and the CGR Management tab.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 445
Penetration Management
This section discusses penetration management setup. The penetration management function works within the ENOVIA environment only - and you must be in the ENOVIA Product Structure. Penetration Management Setup
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 446
2. The outlines of openings are dependent on the shapes defined in the Penetration Shapes catalog. You cannot define an outline in the design rules that does not have a corresponding shape in the catalog. Shapes defined in the sample catalog are: oblong, round, rectangular, square and rectangular radius corner. You can change the values of the parameters of the shapes in the catalog, and you can add new shapes to it. You can remove, replace or rename the sample shapes. Each shape is a parametric part created with the Part Design product, and is stored in the same directory as the catalog. The oblong shape document, for instance, is OblongShape.CATPart. See Part Design documentation for information about using that product. To add a shape you must create it with Part Design and store it in the catalog using standard catalog building procedures. See Creating a Catalog and associated tasks in the Catalog section to learn more about creating and modifying catalogs. These are standard parametric parts and there are no special requirements for building them. When building new shapes you should note that the description name you use in the catalog is the name that will display when you are creating a cutout sketch. 3. Most penetration cutout designing will be done using the design rules, although you have the capability of manually defining cutouts, as explained later in this section. The rules work with the shapes in the catalog to determine the final size of the opening. You can add various parameters to the rules using Knowledgeware. However, the function of the sample rules supplied with this application is mainly to determine the shape of the outline, based on the shapes available in the catalog; and calculate the size of the opening. The cutout size is calculated from the sizes of the objects involved in the penetration, with the addition of required clearances. 4. Design rules can be modified, and new ones created, using Knowledgeware. However, there are certain points you must incorporate in a design rule for it to work correctly with this function. The following information is meant for an administrator, or whoever is creating the design rule. You can see examples in the sample rule, which is reproduced below. A penetration cutout rule should: G Create a variable (defCutout) to hold the DefinePenetrationCutoutShape object, which will communicate the cutout definition to the penetration management command.
G
Calculate the size of the cutout, using attributes of the penetrating and penetrated objects. The NewDefinePenetrationCutoutShape function creates the temporary object that holds the cutout definition. The penetrating object (p1) and penetrated object (p2) are specified. The ShapeName attribute selects the parametric part that defines the shape. The SkewTolerance attribute sets the allowed SkewTolerance for the penetration. The SetAttributeDimension function (or another SetAttributeXXX function) specifies a parameter name in the parametric part, and its value. This function is used repeatedly to set each parameter of the parametric part.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 447
5. The CATIA Domain Discipline Table is used to associate a CATIA model domain to an industrial discipline identified in your company. You are provided with a sample table located in: ...intel_a\reffiles\DomainDiscipMappingTable.xml This table is often sufficient for your requirements, but you can modify it to change the discipline names or add a CATIA model domain. Use any text editor to modify the DomainDiscipMappingTable.xml file. After editing, save the file in the reffiles directory. The following is a sample of the file format:
The ENOVIA discipline names are also user-defined, and must correspond to the discipline names in the ENOVIA Penetration Discipline Table located on the ENOVIA code server in ...\(platform)\reffiles\PenetrationDisciplines.xml. (The paths for all platforms are identical with the exception of the platform identifier. For example, on AIX the platform identifier is .../aix_a/reffiles.) The ENOVIA discipline names are used in ENOVIA to look up the penetration discipline code. The penetration discipline code is used in the Penetration ID, and for assigning workflow activities in a Penetration workflow process.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 448
Defining the Report Format Generating a Report Generating a Report from a Macro Creating a Toolbar Shortcut for a Macro Generate a Bolt Report
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 449
Before you generate a report you need to define its format. This means deciding which properties you are interested in. This report format is kept in a file which you can use to generate reports from other documents. It is recommended that you use queries, as explained below, if you will be modifying a document and running a report on it repeatedly. If you do not use a query the report may not update after you modify a document. To use this function you must first make sure of a setting. Click Tools - Options - General Parameters and Measure and click on the Language tab. Under Language check Load extended language libraries. Either check All Packages, or uncheck this option and load the packages you will be using.
1.
Click Tools - Report - Define. The Report Definition dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 450
2.
You can toggle between Yes and No for the Column headings Sort, GroupBy and Sum. A blank means No. To toggle click beneath the column heading. In the example above, for the attribute Name, Sort is No, Group By is Yes and Sum is No. The report name field is informative. You can use the button next to it to open an existing report. You will need to enter a report name and location when you click the Save As button. Enter a report title - you can enter anything but you must have a title. Check the Show Inherited Attributes box if you want to.
3.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 451
4.
Click on the down arrow and select the dictionary related to your program. In this case the EquipLayout package has been selected. See Using Knowledgeware Packages for more information. Select the type of object. The list of attributes you will see in Step 6 will depend on the type you select here. However, when you generate a report you will get values for all objects in the document that have the attributes included in your report format. If you want to limit the objects for which you get a report you must create a query (Step 8).
5.
6. 7.
Select an attribute in the Attribute field and click the Add button. The attribute will be added in the window. Add as many attributes as you want to. Select Yes or No for the column headings. G Sort: You only Sort by one of the attributes - if you select Name the report will sort in alphabetical order.
G
GroupBy: If you select Yes for one of the attributes, the report will group objects by that attribute. Sum: For dimensional attributes like length. If you select Yes the report will sum up the attribute you selected. For 3D applications it can compute dimensions like length from the document. You must select the correct option in the Generate a Report dialog box - you may need to select the objects and choose the 'currently selected objects' option. For 2D applications attributes must have values defined. Quantity: If you select the Quantity checkbox and the Group By column heading, a Quantity field will be added to the report. It will display a number, which shows how many parts that attribute is common to. For instance, if you group by class name and select the quantity checkbox, the report will show how many objects with the same class name exist in your document.
8.
You can further refine your report by using the Edit - Search function to define a query. This will allow you to generate a report on a narrower selection of check valve, say, of a certain size, instead of all check valves in your document. The queries you create will be available for selection when you click the arrow in the Query Name field above. Detailed instructions on using the Search function can be found in the Infrastructure User Guide under Basic Tasks - Selecting Objects. Briefly, click Edit Search to bring up the Search dialog box. Select the Advanced tab, then select a workbench, type of object and attribute you are interested in. Clicking the Add to Favorites button brings up the Create a Favorite Query dialog box, where you can name the query and save it.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 452
Generating a Report
This task explains how to generate a report listing values of selected properties. Before you do this you need to define the report format. Examples from the Piping Design workbench are used here. Substitute the appropriate resource or directory when working in another workbench. 1. Click Tools - Report - Generate. The Generate Report dialog box displays.
2. Click the Open button and select the format you want to use for your report, in this case NewReport. 3. If you had defined a query in your report format then check Objects From Predefined Query. 4. If you select one or more objects in the document then check the option Currently Selected Objects. 5. Check All Objects in Document if you want a report on all objects in your document. 6. Click OK and select a format, such as HTML, when you are prompted. The report will be generated. It shows values for all properties defined in your report format for all objects in the document that have them. Where an object does not have a property the report displays asterisks.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 453
7. Click Insert in Doc if you want to display these values in your document. To generate the report from a schematic and insert it in a schematic, click on the Insert in Doc button and click anywhere in your drawing. To generate the report from a 3-D document and insert it in a drafting document, click on the Insert in Doc button and select the sheet or view in the specifications tree. Do not select a point in the sheet. The XY Coord dialog box will pop up - enter the location where you want to insert the report. The data will be placed at the location. It can be moved to another location later by click and drag. 8. Click Save As to save the report. Specify a file name and location. If you save the file as XML type, then you can reference two stylesheets that are provided with this application to make the file easier to read. One of the two stylesheets also allows you to sort. The stylesheets are located in the directory ...intel_a\startup\Equipmentand Systems\ReporterData. The stylesheet ReportTable_Sample.xsl changes the looks of the report. The stylesheet ReportTable_SampleSort.xsl allows you to change the looks and sort. Instructions are given in the file itself. But, briefly, in order to use the stylesheet ReportTable_Sample.xsl you need to: G Open your report with a text editor like Wordpad.
G
Add the following line in the header information (it should be the first or second line in the file): <?xmlstylesheet type="text/xsl" href="ReportTable_Sample.xsl"?>
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 454
This task shows you how to create a new report that lists the attributes of an object. As an alternative you can use the methods described in Generating a Report and Defining the Report Format. The report will list the values of attributes like pressure, length, diameter, open/close position etc. These values will only be displayed if they have been added to the object and if the attribute is included in the report. 1.Select the object for which you want to generate a report. You can select objects in the specifications tree or by using the Edit - Search command.
2.Click Tools-Macro-Macros. The Macro dialog box displays. If the file CATSchAttrValueWYSIWYG.CATScript is not displayed in the box then select External File in the Macro In field, click Select and navigate to the directory Intel_a\code\command. Select the file named above and click Open. The file will display in the Macro dialog box.
If you want to edit the script that creates the report, click Edit. You need to have some knowledge and experience of Visual Basic to edit scripts. 3.Select the file and click Run. The Report Generation dialog box will display, asking you to enter the name of a template. Four templates are provided with this application for four types of reports: Part, Instrument, FromTo (for lines) and Equipment. They reside in the Intel_a\code\command directory. Enter the full directory path, based on your setup, and change the last word to one of the four types mentioned above. Your selection will be based on the type of object for which you are seeking to generate a report.
Piping Design
4.Click OK. The report will appear in the form of an Excel spreadsheet. If the object has attributes associated with it, and these attributes are entered in the report, then they will display.
Version 5 Release 16
Page 455
5.If an attribute is not entered in the report you can add it by clicking on an empty column and entering it.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 456
2. 3. 4.
Select the Commands tab and select Macros in the Categories column. All macros are displayed in the Commands column. Click and drag the macro to the toolbar in which you want to place it. The toolbar will display a button that you can click to generate the report. To customize the icon on the button you just created click on Show Properties and then on the Icon button. Icons available to you will be displayed. Select one and click Close.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 457
Min_Nominal Size Max_Nominal Size Part Name Part Code Material Code
EndStyle Rating NominalSize EndDiameter EndThickness HexBoltCount HexBoltLength HexBoltDiameter StudBoltCount StudBoltLength StudBoltDiameter
When complete, the report displays the values for all attributes defined in the column headings of the two text files except for nominal size. See Rules Overview and Modifying Design Rules to find out more. The design tables have to have the correct entries for accurate reports. The bolt report function does the following:
G
Looks for gaskets with a minimum of two connectors that are connected to a flange or valve (one of the connections must be to a flange). Attributes like EndStyle and NominalSize from the flange are used to obtain the bolt count data, using the End Dimensions rules table. If one of the connections is to a valve that has the parameter BoltThrough with a value of Yes, then its bolt count is half of the count found in the table.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 458
To generate a report for the bolts in your document, first make sure the Product is active (highlighted blue). 1. Go to Tools - Macro - Macros. The Macros dialog box displays. If the file CATAttrPipingBOMReport.CATScript does not display initially, click Select and navigate to the directory intel_a\code\command. Select the file named above and click Open. The file displays in the Macro dialog box.
2. Click the Run button. The Report Generation dialog box opens. Enter the file name (and the path) where you want your report created.
3. The Report Generation Complete advisory appears when your report generation is complete. The report is created as an html file if you used the .html file extension. You can also create files as .csv and .txt files by using those file extensions.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 459
4. Now you can navigate to where your report is stored and open the file to view the report.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 460
Catalogs
The following tasks relate to using catalogs for the purpose of placing parts in the Piping Design product.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 461
Creating a Catalog
This task explains how to create a catalog. The Catalog facility is a standard facility provided with the V5 Product line. For detailed information regarding Catalogs, please see the Infrastructure documentation - Advanced Tasks - Using Catalogs. If you are creating a catalog of resolved parts then it is recommended that have no more than about 500 documents in each catalog, so that performance does not suffer. In this case you may need to create several catalogs. To learn how to do this see Creating Sub-Catalogs. Catalogs that point to parametric parts are smaller, and you can have one catalog. This task explains creation of the main catalog. Creation of the specifications catalog and standards is explained elsewhere (not all applications use them). Also, piping parts are used in this example. The procedure is the same for other types of parts (tubing, equipment, etc.). You should be in the workbench (such as Piping Design) for which you want to create a catalog. 1. Open the Catalog Editor by clicking on Start-Infrastructure-Catalog Editor. The Catalog Window opens with a basic catalog structure in the left column. Catalogs are created analogous to books, with the book being at the top level, chapters under it, and, if necessary, sub-chapters under them, and with pages (or parts) at the lowest level. Each family contains references to one or more parts. The illustration below shows the Catalog Editor. The column to the left is where your chapters and families are displayed. The column to the right will display parts when you click on a family.
2. Rename the root chapter (Chapter.1 above) to XXX Part to reflect the application you are working in. In the case of Piping Design, for instance, it will read Piping Part. If you do not do this you will have an extra level in the tree. To rename, right click on it, select Chapter.1 Object - Definition. Enter the new name in the dialog box that displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 462
3. Select the chapter under which you want to create the catalog (in this case Piping Part). Click the Create/Modify Catalog button . The Create/Modify Part Catalog dialog box displays.
4. Select the application in which you want to create the catalog by clicking the down arrow in the Application field. If you want to add specific parts to your catalog then create a parts list file with a text editor. Enter the names of the parts you want to add, each name on a separate line. This is also the process used in modifying a catalog. The Attribute Filter field can be left blank, it is not needed for this process. If you want to have a log of the process then enter a file name in the Message Log field. The file will be created.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 463
5. Click the button next to the Parts Directory field and navigate to the directory where your parts are stored. The default location is ...intel_a\startup\\EquipmentandSystems\XXX\XXXX\ComponentCatalogs\Parametric, where XXX\XXX is the application, such as Piping\PipingDesign. If you have both a Parametric and Resolved parts directory and you want to create catalogs for both then you need to run the command twice. Click OK to begin creating the catalog, which may take a few minutes. A dialog box will inform you of the progress. The image below shows part of a Piping Design catalog.
Chapters and families are displayed in the first column. The second column will display parts (often called descriptions) when you select a family. You can display different kinds of information by selecting the tabs (Reference, etc.) in the second column. The tab Generative Data is used for specifications catalogs.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 464
The Keywords tab displays the keywords (attributes) associated to the object. In addition, each chapter may contain one or more keywords created by the application: as of Release 14 these were three: PartType, GenericList and ReferenceStatus. These are used by the application for specific purpose. Do not delete or modify them. 6. Save your changes. You should become familiar with some of the terminology used with reference to catalogs. In the example above: G The first entry (catalogX.catalog) is the file name. When you save the catalog you will give it a file name which will display here.
G
Piping Part is the root chapter. Branch, Elbows, Flanges, etc., are chapters. Tee, Elbow, Blind Flange, etc., are families.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 465
Creating Sub-Catalogs
This task explains making sub-catalogs. You may need to create several catalogs if you are creating a catalog of resolved parts. It is recommended that you keep the size of each catalog to about 500 documents. Most users will, therefore, need to create several catalogs if they are pointing to resolved parts. This task explains how to use sub-catalogs, and to view them all through one master catalog. The standard catalog creation facility is used to create the sub-catalogs. In fact, Steps 1 to 4 are exactly the same as described in the task Creating a Catalog. Creating a master catalog and linking it to the sub-catalogs involves an additional step that is also explained here. 1.Open the Catalog Editor by clicking on Start-Infrastructure-Catalog Editor. The Catalog Window opens with a basic catalog structure in the left column. Catalogs are created analogous to books, with the book being at the top level, chapters under it, and, if necessary, sub-chapters under them, and with pages (or parts) at the lowest level. Each family contains references to one or more parts. The illustration below shows the Catalog Editor. The column to the left is where your chapters and families are displayed. The column to the right will display parts when you click on a family.
2.Rename the root chapter (Chapter.1 above) to XXX Part to reflect the application you are working in. In the case of Piping Design, for instance, it will read Piping Part. If you do not do this you will have an extra level in the tree. To rename, right click on it, select Chapter.1 Object - Definition. Enter the new name in the dialog box that displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 466
3.Select the chapter under which you want to create the catalog (in this case Piping Part). Click the Create/Modify Catalog button . The Create/Modify Part Catalog dialog box displays.
4.Select the application in which you want to create the catalog by clicking the down arrow in the Application field. 5.There are now two ways in which you can create a sub-catalog. G If the parts you want in your sub-catalog are stored in one directory - and there are no other parts in that directory then click the button next to the Parts Directory field and navigate to the directory where your parts are stored. Click OK and all the parts in that directory will be placed in the catalog. The application will automatically determine what the chapter and family are and create them accordingly. If you have only reducing tees in the directory it will create the chapter Branch, then the family Reducing Tee under it, and place all the parts in it. If you have reducing tees and blind flanges in it, it will create the chapters Branch and Flanges, and the families Reducing Tee and Blind Flanges under them.
G
If your parts are in one directory but you want to store them in separate catalogs, then you need to create a text file for each sub-catalog that you want to make. Give the files any names you want. In each file list the names of the parts (each must be on a separate line) that you want to place in a sub-catalog. After you select the directory in which your parts are, click the button next to the Parts List field and navigate to the text file you created. Click OK.
The Attribute Filter field can be left blank, it is not needed for this process. If you want to have a log of the process then create a file and enter the location in the Message Log field. 6.Make as many sub-catalogs as you need to and save each one as you make it. 7.You may now want to make a master catalog and link it to all your sub-catalogs - this makes it convenient to view all your . Enter the parts. Repeat Steps 1 & 2 as explained above, then select your catalog and click the Add Chapter button chapter name in the dialog box that displays, for instance, Branch. The chapter displays beneath your catalog.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 467
8.Open the sub-catalog you want to link to in this application - Tile Vertically or Horizontally so that you can view both. , and then select the family you want to Select a chapter in your master catalog. Click the Add Link to Catalog button link to in the sub-catalog. The family will display beneath the chapter in your master catalog. Add as many chapters and families as you want to and save the master catalog. In the image below both catalogs have been opened and tiled vertically.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 468
Modifying a Catalog
This task explains how to modify a catalog. Modifying refers to adding a new part you have created to a catalog, or updating a catalog after changing the attribute values of a part. In the example below a new part - belonging to a new chapter and family - will be added to a catalog. 1. Place the part you created in the directory to which the catalog points. If you are modifying a part it will already be in that directory. 2. Create a text file (give it any name you want), with a text editor like Wordpad, and enter the name of the new part you want to add or the part you have modified. In this example the part to be added is: M_EXPJNT_FLRF.CATPart. Enter each part on a separate line. 3. Enter the workbench to which the catalog belongs. Click File - Open and navigate to the catalog you want to modify. It opens in the Catalog Editor. 4. Click the Create/Modify Catalog button . The Create/Modify Part Catalog dialog box displays.
If you want to add parts only to existing chapters and families then check the Add Components to Existing Families checkbox. In the specifications tree, select the chapter or family to which you want to add (or modify) parts (you need to do this before you click the Create/Modify Catalog button). As an example, if you select the chapter Fitting shown in Step 8, then new parts will only be added to the existing five families shown. New families will not be created, even if your parts list contains them. Parts will not be added to any other chapter. 5. If the parts are stored on a file system then select File Base and follow the steps below. If they are stored in ENOVIA then select ENOVIA Base and enter the names of all parts in a text file as explained in Step 2. You can also load all parts in memory (if they are in the catalog), in which case they will display in the Select Documents window, and select the parts to process. (To load into memory, first open the catalog, then click File - Desk, all the lines display, select the lines, right-click on the selected line and select Open in the drop down menu.)
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 469
6. Select the application in which you want to modify the catalog by clicking the down arrow in the Application field. 7. Click the button next to the Parts Directory field and navigate to the directory where your parts are stored. The default location is ...intel_a\startup\\EquipmentandSystems\XXX\XXXX\ComponentCatalogs\Parametric, where XXX\XXX is the application, such as Piping\PipingDesign. 8. Click the button next to the Parts List field and navigate to the text file you created, containing the names of new and modified parts. Click OK to begin modifying the catalog, which may take a few minutes. A dialog box will inform you of the progress. 9. The part M_EXPJNT_FL-RF is added to the catalog. The family to which it belongs did not exist in the catalog so the family is also created. The chapter (FITTING) to which it belongs exists in the catalog so it is placed under that chapter.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 470
This task shows you how to create a specifications catalog.An example from the Piping workbench is used here. The process for other workbenches is the same - simply use the relevant CATfct file and terminology. For instance, in the Tubing workbench you would use Tubing Part instead of Piping Part. A specifications catalog allows you to specify which parts can be used for a certain project or part of a project. The parts or the main catalog typically contains all the parts available to you. However, in many circumstances you will only want to use parts that have certain properties - if you are building a system for conveying hot gases under pressure, for instance, you will only want to use pipes and parts that have a certain heat tolerance, are made of certain materials and have a certain pressure rating. You achieve this by specifying in the specifications catalog what the properties should be for the parts you want to use. The specifications catalog will not contain copies of the parts, but when you place parts using it, you will only be able to use parts from the main catalog that meet the criteria you have specified in that specifications catalog. The specifications catalog provides another important function - it can generate new parts for a project without increasing the number of parts in the main catalog. This is done because the specifications catalog can apply a value to an attribute on a part in the main catalog. This attribute is referred to as generic attribute. This can significantly reduce the number of parts you have in your main catalog. The way it works is like this: say you have four projects in your company that use pipe made of four different materials. You do not have to create four main catalogs, or add four pipes to one catalog, each with a different material defined. Instead what you can do is add one pipe to your main catalog with the attribute 'materialcode' (or any term you choose) but with no value defined for this attribute. Now, when you create the attribute filter file (explained in Step 9 below) you list the material you want for a particular project and put an asterisk after it. The material you have listed will be defined for the property materialcode. All you have to do is make four specifications with the four different materials you need. In addition to specifying the properties of parts, you also have to associate rules tables. This application incorporates intelligent design functions. This means that as you design, the application ensures your designing meets certain criteria. These criteria are established by the design rules. For instance, the design rules will match the threaded end of a pipe to the threaded end of a part. (You can override the rules if you want.) When you use the provided template to create a specifications catalog you can modify the design rules (see Modifying Design Rules) but you cannot add new rules. 1. Click Start - Infrastructure - Catalog Editor to start the Catalog Editor.
2. Open the CATfct file associated with your application. To do this, click the Open User Dictionary button to display the Open User Dictionary dialog box and navigate to the directory where your CATfct files are. The default location is intel_a\resources\graphic. In this example the CATPipingSample.CATfct file will be opened. You can add default rules to your specifications catalog (explained below). These rules appear in a separate chapter named "Default". The rules in the Default chapter will apply to all specifications that you create - if they are not defined in that specification. When you are placing a part using a particular specification, the application first determines if relevant rules are defined under that specification. If they are defined then it will use those rules. If they are not defined then it will use the rule under the Default specification. This saves you having to associate rules for each specification that you create.
Piping Design
3. Click the Add Catalog Template button the image below only one file is open.
Version 5 Release 16
Page 471
. The Add Catalog Template dialog box displays, listing all CATfct files that are open. In
4. Select the application (Piping), and then click on the down arrow in the Template Type field and make your selection - in this case Material Specification. Enter a name for the specifications catalog in the Template Name field. If you are creating default rules you must enter the name Default. Click on the Browser button next to the Part Type field and make your selection. In this case it is Piping Part because this is a Piping specifications catalog. Click OK. The Default chapter and the default design rules display in the specifications tree.
In applications where you can create both a material specifications catalog and insulation specifications catalog, there may be differences in the design rules that appear in each type of catalog.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 472
5. You now need to associate the actual design rules table (which is how design rules are defined) to each of the design rules in the specifications tree. Double click on a rule and then click the Add Component button displays. . The Description Definition dialog box
6. Click the Select Document button. In the File Selection box that displays navigate to the directory where the design rules tables are. They are CATProduct type files. (From Release 13 you can link directly to the text tables that define each rule.) The default directory is intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\XXX\Specification (where XXX is your application) and then the specification itself, say Cs150r. Open the Cs150r directory and select the text file (or table) that corresponds to the rule that you double-clicked, in this case BranchingRules. Click Open on the File Selection box and OK on the Description Definition box. The table will be associated with the rule and display in the Catalog Editor.
If you click on the Reference tab you will be able to see the full directory path. 7. Associate all the rules with the corresponding tables using the procedure described above. There is a slightly different process for associating the FunctionalPhysicalMapping tables. If you associate to the CATProduct then you need to associate with one file. If you associate with the text files then you will need to associate with one text file for each function, following the process given above. (From Release 13 the sample catalog points to text files.) Also, in the Description Definition dialog box you should make sure to enter the actual function name in the Name field. For instance, if you are associating the text table XXX_FunctionPhysical-Branch.txt, the function name for it is XXXBranchFunc, where XXX is the application, such as Piping. 8. After you have associated the rules you can create one or more specifications. To do this, select the root chapter and click the Add . Enter a name in the Chapter Definition dialog box. Chapter button 9. You need to take a couple of preparatory steps before you begin the process of creating a specifications catalog. G All the parts you want the catalog to contain must be placed in a directory.
G
You must create an attribute filter file - in text or Excel format. The purpose of the file is to identify the parts that you want the specification catalog to point to. You can place this file in any location - but you need to navigate to it in the following step. Part of a file is shown below:
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 473
1. The first line contains the properties, or keywords. You can add any property that is defined for a part. 2. You can add "Min" or "Max" before a property to identify the minimum or maximum value the catalog should point to. If a part has a property value outside this range it will not be included. 3. If you add an asterisk (*) after a property (in the column heading) then the value of that property in the part will be replaced by the value you enter in this file. You can also add the asterisk after a particular value. The value has to be 'character type' - not a figure. So, if you place an asterisk in the column heading then this behavior will apply to all parts. If you place it against a particular value, then it will only apply to that particular part. The usage is explained at the beginning of this task. 4. You can give the file any name. 10. Click the Create/Modify Catalog button . The Create/Modify Catalog dialog box displays.
Select the application in which you want to create the catalog by clicking the down arrow in the Application field. In the Parts Directory field, navigate to the directory where your parts are. If you want to add specific parts to your catalog then create a parts list file with a text editor. Enter the names of the parts you want to add, each name on a separate line. This is also the process used in modifying a catalog. In the Attribute Filter field navigate to the file you created in Step 9. If you want to have a log of the process then enter a file name and location in the Message Log field. The file will be created. Check the Add Components only to Existing Families checkbox if you do NOT want new families to be created - parts will only be added if a family exists in the catalog. This should not be checked if you are creating a new catalog.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 474
Line ID Catalogs
This section discusses steps needed for line IDs customization. Displaying Line ID Properties in Catalog Modifying/Updating a Lines Catalog
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 475
Added properties you want displayed in the attribute filter file. Valuated the properties. Updated the catalog.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 476
2. Click the Create/Modify Catalog button . The Create/Modify Part Catalog dialog box displays.
3. If the lines are stored on a file system then select File Base and follow the steps below. If they are stored in ENOVIA then select ENOVIA Base and enter the names of all lines in a text file as explained in Step 4. You can also load all lines in memory (if they are in the catalog), in which case they will display in the Select Documents window, and select the lines to process. (To load into memory, first open the catalog, then click File - Desk, all the lines display, select the lines, right-click on the selected line and select Open in the drop down menu.) 4. If you want to update all the lines then you do not need to take this step (unless you are using ENOVIA). This step is necessary only if you want to update some of the lines in the directory, or if you are using the ENOVIA Base option. Create a text file (give it any name you want), with a text editor like Wordpad, and enter the name of the new line you want to add or the line you have modified. Enter each line ID on a separate line. For ENOVIA-based you must enter the names of all lines you want to add or update. 5. Select the application in which you want to modify the catalog by clicking the down arrow in the Application field.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 477
6. Click the button next to the Parts Directory field and navigate to the directory where the lines are stored. The default location is ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\XXX\SampleData\PipingLines where XXX\XXX is the application, such as Piping\. The file is CATPspPipingLine.catalog. 7. If you want to modify selected lines then click the button next to the Parts List field and navigate to the text file you created in Step 1. Click OK to begin modifying the catalog, which may take a few minutes. A dialog box will inform you of the progress. 8. If you were updating a pre-Release 14 lines catalog then it will be updated with additional attributes. The image below shows some of the lines in the updated catalog.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 478
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 479
Rules Overview
This task provides an overview of the functions that use each design rule (as of R10). Click on the links to get more information. Not all products use each of these rules. See Modifying Design Rules for links to an explanation of each of the rules, and to learn more about rules and how to modify them. 1. Compatibility Parts placement (catalog filtering)
G
Bending
G
Values for attributes Bend Radius and Grip Length used by two Knowledge Expert rules. (See Using & Modifying Knowledgeware Rules.) Values for attribute Minimum Tangent Length is used in the routing a run function to establish the minimum length of a segment. Values for attribute Maximum Length used by Knowledge Expert rule. (See Using & Modifying Knowledgeware Rules.)
Length
Used by the routing a run function. G The Outside Diameter value is used to determine the envelope size of a run.
G
Dimension
The Bend Diameter value is used to calculate the turn (bend) radius of a run and is displayed in the Run dialog box. The Wall Thickness values are used to determine wall thickness when placing a part.
Automatic Parts ISO Mapping rules - attributes, endstyles and symbols. End Dimension
Parts Placement Isogen function - creating a 2-D drawing from a 3-D document.
G
Drawing Production Generating a bolt (bill of materials) report. Bolt (bill of materials) report to obtain attribute values. Isogen, to obtain attribute values for the 2D drawing.
Bolting
G
Parts placement. Filter for parts in a catalog when placing a part in a branch situation. Outputs value which is picked up by the Welding Rule table. Parts placement, to determine type of weld to be placed between parts.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 480
Used by the routing a run function. G It is used to establish the bend radius of a run if there is a value in the BendRadius column.
G
Turn
If there is no value in the bend radius column then the bend radius is calculated by multiplying the value in the DiameterFactor column by the value in the Bend Diameter column of the Dimension design table. If the value in the NumberofMiterCuts column is other than 0 then elbows are mitered.
Insulation
Parts Placement
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 481
This task shows you how to modify the design rules. Also see Understanding Project Resource Management.There are links at the end of this task explaining each design rule, and you can also consult a Design Rules Overview. This application incorporates intelligent design functions. This means that as you design, the application ensures your designing meets certain criteria. These criteria are established by the design rules. For instance, the design rules will match the threaded end of a pipe to the threaded end of a part. (You can overrule the rules if you want.) The design rules in turn depend upon certain tables where the basic data is entered. You can modify or add to these tables if you want different or additional design rules. Typically, only the system administrator, or a designated person familiar with industry standards, will make such a change. The tables that come with the application are in the following directories: ...\intel_a\Startup\EquipmentAndSystems\XXX\DesignRules ; Standards and Specification (XXX stands for an application, such as Piping). If you want to modify the general design rules, which apply to all designing, you must modify the tables in the DesignRules directory. For design rules particular to a standard, look for tables in the Standards directory; and for design rules particular to a specifications catalog, look for tables under the Specification directory. To explain further: General design rules apply to all designing. Design rules you place in a particular standard apply only when you use that standard during design time. It is done this way because values may vary from standard to standard. Design rules you place in a specifications catalog apply only when you use that specification. In making changes you should not alter the structure beneath the EquipmentAndSystems directory. NOTE: From Release 13 design rules catalogs can point directly to the text files that define a rule - these are the files referred to in Step 1 below. If a catalog points directly to a text file then, to modify, use the procedure in Step 1. If your catalog points to a CATProduct then you can follow both procedures: the one in Step 1, or the one described in Steps 2 & 3. 1. You should only modify the text files - those with a .txt extension. Files with a CATProduct or catalog extension should not be modified. To modify, open the file with a text editor like Notepad and make your changes or additions. Do not change the table structure or column headings. Use the tab key to move between columns, and do not add leading or trailing spaces to your entries. 2. You can also modify the tables by opening them in the application. To do this drag onto the workbench the CATProduct file associated with the table you want to modify. If you want to modify the Piping-Compatibility.text table then drag the Piping-Compatibility.CATProduct file onto the workbench. Double click on the table in the specifications tree to bring up Knowledge Advisor.
3. Double click on the file again to display the Compatibility table. Click on the Edit table button to display the text file that you can modify. The rules explained in Step 1 apply. Save the changes you make to the text table. You do not need to save the CATProduct file.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 482
4. Click on the links below to learn how each design rule functions. Not all rules apply to each application.
Rules Overview Compatibility Rule Bending Rule Length Rule Dimension Rule Using & Modifying Knowledgeware Rules Automatic Parts Rule End Dimensions Rule Bolting Rule Branching Rule Shop Fabrication Rule Turn Rule HVAC Turn Rule Welding Rule Insulation Thickness ISO Attribute Mapping Rule ISO Endstyle Mapping Rule ISO Symbols Mapping Rule
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 483
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 484
5. Click Start - Infrastructure - Catalog Editor to start the Catalog Editor. The Catalog Editor will display.
6. Open the CATfct file associated with your application. To do this, click the Open User Dictionary button to display the Open User Dictionary dialog box and navigate to the directory where your CATfct files are. The default location is intel_a\resources\graphic. In this example the CATPipingSample.CATfct file will be opened. (CATfct files contain classes and attributes.) 7. Click the Add Catalog Template button files that are open. . The Add Catalog Template dialog box displays, listing all CATfct
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 485
8. Select the application and click on the down arrow in the Template Type field to make your selection, in this case Standard. Enter a name for the standard. Click on the Browser button next to the Part Type field to display the Class Browser. Select the line Piping Part and click OK. Click OK on the Add Catalog Template dialog box, which should add the standard MAR to the specifications tree with the attributes displayed, as shown in the image below.
9. You now need to make sure the attributes that display in the application point to the text files (tables) you just to display created. Double click on an attribute, say MaterialCode, and click on the Add Component button the Description Definition dialog box. 10. Click the Select Document button. In the File Selection box that displays navigate to the MAR directory you created in Step 1 and select the file that corresponds to the attribute that you double-clicked, in this case MaterialCode. Click Open on the File Selection box and OK on the Description Definition box. The table will be associated with the attribute. Do this for all the attributes as well as the design rules that appear at the end of the list. You can link the design rules to corresponding text files using the method described above. If you do so you do not need to follow the steps given below. If you want to link design rules to a CATProduct then take the following steps. 11. You now need to point the CATProduct files in the MAR directory to the corresponding text file (table). And you need to change references in the new standard so that they point to the renamed CATProduct files. To make these changes you need to change a setting in your Options. Click Tools - Options - Infrastructure, select Product Structure and click the Tree Customization tab. Under Specification Tree Order click on Relations so that Yes appears in the Activated column. 12. To point the .CATProduct files to the renamed text files, begin by opening the .CATProduct file in the application one way is to drag the file from Windows Explorer onto the workbench. It will display in the specifications tree. In this example the file BendingRules will be changed - in the illustration below it has been opened.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 486
13. Double click on the entry Bending Rules - make sure to click on the entry beneath Relations as shown above - to enter the Knowledge Advisor workbench. 14. Right click on BendingRules to bring up a menu and select Properties. The Properties dialog box will display.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 487
15. Click on the button next to the File Path field, navigate to the renamed text file and select it. Click Open. Save your change. You need to do this for each .CATProduct file. 16. You now need to change the references in your new standard (MAR) so that they point to the CATProduct files. To do this open MAR.catalog in the application by dragging it onto the workbench from Windows Explorer. The catalog can be found in the Standards directory. 17. The catalog will display in the Catalog Editor. Double click on the .CATProduct file - in this case BendingRules - to to display the Description Definition dialog box. make it active and then click the Add Component button 18. Click the Select Document button. In the File Selection box that displays navigate to the MAR directory you created in Step 1 and select the CATProduct file that corresponds to the CATProduct that you double-clicked, in this case BendingRules. Click Open on the File Selection box and OK on the Description Definition box. The file will be associated with the CATProduct. Do this for all the CATProducts. 19. Click File - Save to save the changes once you are done. The General Design Catalog The General Design Catalog is used to store attributes whose values are the same in all standards. For instance, the pipe specification CS150R has the same value in all standards, because it is referring to a carbon steel pipe with a 150-pound rating. Another example: the attribute "okay to cut" has only two possible values, Yes or No, in all standards. The General Design Catalog was created so that you do not have to enter such attributes in all the standards you create, but instead enter them one time in this directory. The application will first check the standard to see if the attribute is located there and, if it does not find it, will refer to the General Design Catalog. If you create a new standard, you need to incorporate it in the design rules or the new standard will be ignored by the rules. To incorporate it you must add the new standard in the appropriate column in the rules tables.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 488
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 489
3. Double click on the standard to which you want to add an attribute - in this case ASTL - to make it active and click on the Add Family button . The Component Family Definition dialog box displays.
4. Enter a name for the new attribute. Under Type select Standard. Click OK. The new attribute will display in the list of attributes under ASTL.
5. Double click NewAttribute to make it active and click the Add Component button Definition dialog box displays. . The Description
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 490
6. Click the Select Document button and, in the File Selection dialog box that displays, navigate to the file you created in Step 1. Select the file and click Open. The values in the text file are now linked to the attribute you just created. 7. You can also use the procedure described above to create an attribute in the "default" directory.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 491
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 492
3. Navigate to the directory where your .CATfct files are stored. The default is .. intel_a\resources\graphic. The CATfct files contain a list of all the object classes. Select and open the file associated with the product you are working with, i.e. Piping or Tubing, etc. All the classes in the file are displayed in the Feature Dictionary.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 493
4. Select a class in the specifications tree and click the Define ID Schema button ID Schema dialog box will display. . The Define
If the class does not have object naming rules defined then the Inherited From field will indicate the parent from which they are derived. If the class has rules defined then the same class name will display, as in the image above. If no rules exist for this class then they will be created when you take the following steps. 5. You have two options In the ID usage field, Instance and Reference, and you usually have to define naming rules for each object using both options. The naming rules you define under the Instance option are used by the application when you are placing a part in a document. The naming rules you define using the Reference option are used by the application when you build a component for placing in a catalog. Most users will define naming rules for an object using both options. Depending on your needs, you can choose to simplify the procedure by defining rules for the parent function, which is Piping Part Function in the example above, and these rules will be inherited by all the objects under it. Select Yes or No for Sequence number. Yes or No cannot be selected if you have Reference as the ID usage. Minimum length refers to the number of digits in the numbering scheme. For instance, 3 means the number will show up as 001.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 494
6. Click the Define/modify ID schema button display. . The Define/modify ID schema dialog box will
7. In this dialog box you can define what you want to appear in the name of an object, in this case the object being Piping Part Function. The dialog box has a window in the lower half which displays the current naming scheme. You can delete one or more of the fields using the Delete field/Delete all fields buttons .
Click Add after entering or selecting a value in a field. You can choose to have more than one attribute value displayed in a name, for instance when you want to add a Separator at more than one place. Click Add after selecting each one. You can select the order in which the values will appear in a name by using the Up or Down arrows or the buttons in the Insert mode field. If you want to use computed attributes in the object name then see Add Computed Attribute to Object Name. 8. Select one of the attributes from the drop down list in the Attribute name field
. If you select Nominal size, for instance, the object name will display the nominal size of the object. These attributes are for the Piping Part class only - other classes will have different attributes displayed. You can display more than one attribute in the name.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 495
9. Enter any value you want displayed in the Constant field. If you enter PP (for Piping Part), all piping part names will display this value. You can add a constant to a name anywhere you require it. For instance, you may begin a name with PP, and end it with WR for a project name. 10. The Program field is used to execute a program that will then add a value to the name. You can create your own programs, but some sample programs are provided with the application and are listed below. Enter a program name in this field if you want it to be executed. For instance, if you enter CATPspEncSchedule in the field, then the short value of the Encoded Schedule attribute will be added to the name (the short value of Extra Strong is XS.). These programs are Standards-based and will execute based on the standard you have defined in your Options. The default standard is ASTL. The following list shows the programs provided with the application as a sample, and the attributes they refer to:
G
CATPspEncRating - Encoded Rating CATPspEncRating2 - Encoded Rating2 CATPspEncRating3 - Encoded Rating3 CATPspEncRating4 - Encoded Rating4 CATPspEncNominalSize - Encoded Nominal Size CATPspEncNominalSize2 - Encoded Nominal Size2 CATPspEncNominalSize3 - Encoded Nominal Size3 CATPspEncNominalSize4 - Encoded Nominal Size4 CATPspEncSchedule - Encoded Schedule CATPspEncMaterialCategory - Encoded MaterialCategory CATPspEncMaterialCode - Encoded MaterialCode
11. The Domain program field is used to execute a program that will add the name of the domain to which the object belongs. Domain in this case refers to an object to which the object to be named is connected. For instance, when naming a nozzle it is preferable to add the name of the equipment to which it is connected. One sample domain program is provided with the application, and provides this function: CATPspConnectedEquip. 12. The Separator field is used to add separators, such as a hyphen or semi colon, after the domain field. 13. Use the buttons in the Insert mode field to organize the name. Append field to list will move a field to the end of the name. The other buttons are used when you are adding a field, to position it in the name.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 496
14.
FOR HVAC DUCTS If you want to place 'heavy' HVAC ducts then you need to change the file that defines the object naming rules. (You do not need to make any change if you are placing 'light' parts.) If you are placing heavy parts then navigate to the directory ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\HVAC\DataDictionary. The default files are named sch-CATHvaHVACXXXXDuct1.xml where XXXX represents a shape like FlatOval. Rename this file so that the application does not recognize it - you can add a SAVE at the end, for instance. You need to use the corresponding file that has the _HV at the end of the file name. This file is in the same directory, and normally directly beneath the file for light parts. To use this file simply remove the _HV. As an example:
G
Rename sch-CATHvaHVACXXXXDuct1.xml to sch-CATHvaHVACFlatOvalDuct1_SAVE.xml Remove the _HV from the file sch-CATHvaHVACFlatOvalDuct1_HV.xml
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 497
2. You can use a computed attribute that is defined for a particular class or its parent, and that has been exposed in Knowledgeware. To learn more about exposed attributes see Using Knowledgeware Packages. You should also see Knowledgeware documentation to learn more about Knowledgeware. 3. The contents of the sample ID Schema file look like this:
<?xml version = "1.0" encoding="ASCII"?> <!DOCTYPE Doct SYSTEM "schemaid.dtd"><!-- @version: --> <Doct> <schema_CST value="RED"/> <schema_CST value="-"/> <schema_SeqNbr seq_IEND="6" seq_NMIN="3" seq_ISTART="1"/></Doct>
4. You need to add a line after the word <Doct> to define the computed attribute you want displayed in the object name. To add the attribute insert the following line: <schema_ATT value = "XXXXX"/> where XXXXX is the computed attribute such as ParentPipingLineName. Save the file (do not change the file type).
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 498
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 499
3. An attribute can only be added under the DiscreteValues column. Double click on it to make it active and click on the Add Family button . The Component Family Definition dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 500
4. Enter a name for the new attribute. Under Type select Standard. Click OK. The new attribute will display in the list of attributes under DiscreteValues.
5. Double click new attribute, in this case VendorName, to make it active and click the Add Component button . The Description Definition dialog box displays.
6. Click the Select Document button and, in the File Selection dialog box that displays, navigate to the file you created in Step 1. Select the file and click Open. The values in the text file are now linked to the attribute you just created. Save your changes.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 501
Turn Rule Bending Rule Length Rule Dimensions rules (pipe dimension, tube dimension, etc.) Bolting Rule Branching Rule Shop Fabrication Rule End Dimensions Rule
Piping Design
Map
Page 502
The chart below is a quick reference of some of the resources included with this application (as of R14). Ways in which these resources are used are described elsewhere in this user guide. Most columns are self-explanatory. Some that may need additional information are explained below. Controlled by PRM: Whether the resource has an entry in the project resource management file. Usually this is the location of the resource. NLS: National Language Support (NLS) files contain resource names that can be defined by the user. If you change to another language, for instance, you will need to change the names in the NLS files. In the column below, 'Yes" means that the files have terminology (such as the values of attributes) that needs to be changed if you change NLS files. NLS files are located in the directory: intel_a\resources\msgcatalog. Units: These files contain units that were defined in the metric system by default. If you choose to go to another system you must modify these files. Administrator: Files that have "No" against them cannot be modified. Others can be modified as noted. Depending on the file type, files can be modified using Wordpad (text or XML files), Excel, or within the relevant application itself (CATProduct, catalog or CATDrawing files).
File name
File Type
Controlled by PRM
NLS
Units
Administrator
Contents
Object ID Schema definition (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\DataDictionary) sch-CATPipPipingPart xml Directory Path sch-CATPipPipingPartFunction xml Directory Path Design Rules setup data (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\DesignRules) PipingDesignRules Piping-AttributeFilter Piping-AttributeFilter Piping-AutomaticParts Piping-AutomaticParts Piping-Compatibility Piping-Compatibility catalog CATProduct txt CATProduct txt CATProduct txt Yes No No No No No No
Yes Yes
No No
No No No No No No No
Catalog containing the list of rules available for a project. Attribute filter used for catalog filtering Automatic parts rules. Used during parts placement Connectivity compatibility definition rules. Used during parts placement and catalog search.
No No No No
No No No Yes
No Yes No No
No Yes - Administrator No Yes - Administrator Function/Physical mapping rules. Used during parts placement and 2D/3D Integration and validation. Defines the allowable penetration clearance values for Pipes.
Piping-ISOAttributeMapping
CATProduct
No
No
No
No File containing the mapping between CATIA Piping attributes and ISOGEN attributes. Used in the ISOGEN interface.
Piping-ISOAttributeMapping
txt
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
Piping-ISOEndStyleMapping
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
Piping Design
Piping-ISOEndStyleMapping
Version 5 Release 16
txt No No No
Page 503
Yes - Administrator
File containing the mapping between CATIA Piping End Style attribute values and ISOGEN End Style attribute values. Used in the ISOGEN interface.
Piping-IsoSymbols
CATProduct
No
No
No
No File containing the mapping between CATIA Piping Symbol names and ISOGEN Symbol names. Used in the ISOGEN interface. Schematic design starter document containing all sample rules and checks Piping schematic design starter document containing all Piping sample rules and checks Document containing all sample design checks
Piping-IsoSymbols
txt
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
AllDiagramsStarterDocument
CATProduct
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingDiagramStarterDocument PipingDiagramChecks
CATProduct CATProduct
No No
No No
No No
Standard independent attributes (startup\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\DesignRules\\DiscreteValues) PipingOKToCut.txt PipingSymbolName.txt txt txt No No No Yes No No Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Discrete list that contain two values: Yes or No. This is used to indicate if an elbow can be cut or not. Discrete list of part symbols used during part creation.
insulation specification setup data (startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\InsulationSpecification And FG or GW) PipingInsulationSpecifications FG-PipeThicknessRule.CATProduct FG-InsulationThicknessRangeTable.txt catalog CATProduct txt Yes No No Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes - Administrator No Yes - Administrator Insulation thickness definition as a function of size and temperature. Catalog containing the insulation specification and insulation thickness definition data.
Part definition data (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\PipingDesign\\ComponentCatalogs) ConnectorAttributes txt Yes Yes No Yes - Administrator File contains the list of attributes that can be assigned to connectors. Used during part build. File contains the list of graphic representations(Single, Double, etc.). Used during part build. Fully resolved piping catalog. Can be used in ENOVIA-LCA as a sample catalog. There is a specification catalog that is syncronized with this catalog (See PipingSpecificationsResolved.catalog).
GraphicRepresentations
txt
Yes
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingResolvedCatalogs.zip
zip
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Piping Design
PipingResolvedCatalogsTemplate.zip
Version 5 Release 16
zip No Yes Yes
Page 504
Yes - Administrator
README.txt
txt
No
Yes
No
No
Template piping parts catalog. This tempate can be used as a starter for defining small nested piping catalogs. For more information see the README file. This file contain instruction of how to use the starter template catalog defined in: PipingResolvedCatalogsTemplate.zip
Parts Catalog (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\PipingDesign\\ComponentCatalogs\\Parametric) PipingParts.catalog B_TEE_WM-BW B_TEE_WM-BW B_TEE_WM-BW EL_90_WM-BW-LR EL_90_WM-BW-LR EL_90_WM-BW-LR_Single PIPE_HV-BENDABLE-BW PIPE_HV-BENDABLE-BW catalog CATPart txt CATShape CATPart txt CATShape CATPart txt Yes No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Piping Catalog points to all parts that can be placed using the "Place Piping Parts" command. TEE Piping part definition Design table definition TEE Single line graphic representation Elbow Piping part definition Design table definition Elbow Single line graphic representation Pipe with bend Piping part definition Design table definition
Drawing Customization data (startup\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\PipingDesign\\DrawingCatalogs) PipingPartsAnnotations ATSDefinitions-PipingParts catalog CATDrawing No No Yes Yes No No Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Catalog containing the association between text template Drawing document containing the text templates for 3D object classes. Associate 2D symbols to specific Piping drawing customization. Such as single line display, etc. This catalog is used in conjunction with GVS to decide when these special application symbols should be used. Drawing document containing the 2D symbols that are used for piping drawing customization.
Piping2DSymbols-Customization
catalog
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Piping2DSymbols-Customization
CATDrawing
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Diagram Component Catalogs (startup\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\PipingDiagrams\\ComponentCatalogs) PID_ANSI.catalog PID_ANSI_Equipment.catalog PID_ANSI_Equipment_.CATProduct PID_ANSI_Instruments.catalog PID_ANSI_Instruments_.CATProduct PID_ANSI_PipingFunction.catalog PID_ANSI_PipingFunction_.CATProduct catalog catalog CATProduct catalog CATProduct catalog CATProduct Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Parent catalog of Piping diagram components Catalog of Piping diagram components Diagram reference components Catalog of Piping diagram components Diagram reference components Catalog of Piping diagram components Diagram reference components
Piping Design
No No
No No
Catalog of Piping diagram off sheets Diagram off sheets Similar to the ANSI sample catalogs Similar to the ANSI sample catalogs
PipingAnnotations
catalog
No
Design Rules
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
No No No
No No No
No No No
No No No
Rule for checking maximum bend radius during Bendable creation. Rule for checking maximum Run Length during Bendable creation. Rule for checking maximum Bendable Length during Bendbale creation.
PipingLineIDImportSample
xml
No
Sample Reports
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Sample Piping line definition. This XML file when imported will generate the sample Piping line list.
No No No
No No No
Sample parts list report in txt file Sample parts list report in txt file Sample parts list report in Excel file This report contains the From component and the TO component for every line that is reported. This report contains the From component and the TO component for every line that is reported. Sample report for generating In-Spec or Out-Of-Spec status. Report definition is in txt format. Sample report for generating In-Spec or Out-Of-Spec status. Report definition is in Excel format. Sample report for generating Pipe cut length. Definition is in txt file format. Sample report for generating Pipe cut length. Definition is in Excel file format.
PipingFromToReportSample.txt
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingFromToReportSample.xls
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingSpecificationStatusReportSample
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
No No No
No No No
Piping Lines data (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\SampleData\\PipingLines) CATPipPipingLine CATPspPipingLine20010507093800 catalog CATProduct Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Piping Line catalog. Contains a list of all the sample Piping lines. Sample Piping line definition file. There are more lines in this directory, however, the definition is identical.
Piping Design
PipingSpecifications
Version 5 Release 16
catalog Yes Yes Yes
Page 506
Yes - Administrator
PipingSpecification_sample_CS150R
txt
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
PipingSpecifications-Resolved.catalog
catalog
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
PipingSpecifications-Template.catalog CS150R-BoltingRules CS150R-BoltingRules CS150R-BranchingRules CS150R-BranchingRules CS150R-FunctionPhysicalMapping CS150R-FunctionPhysical-Branch CS150R-FunctionPhysical-BranchConnection CS150R-FunctionPhysical-InLineInstrument CS150R-FunctionPhysical-Reducer CS150R-FunctionPhysical-Terminator CS150R-FunctionPhysical-Pipe CS150R-FunctionPhysical-Valve CS150R-ShopFabricationRules CS150R-ShopFabricationRules CS150R-TurnRules CS150R-TurnRules CS150R-WeldingRules CS150R-WeldingRules
catalog CATProduct txt CATProduct txt CATProduct txt txt txt txt txt txt txt CATProduct txt CATProduct txt CATProduct txt
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
Yes - Administrator No Yes - Administrator No Yes - Administrator No Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator Yes - Administrator No Yes - Administrator No Yes - Administrator No Yes - Administrator
Specification catalog. This catalog will be used during specification driven parts placement and specification driven bend definition. Sample piping specification query definition in a text file. This file shows the format of how the external definition of specificaiton query is dfined. Resolved specification catalog. This specification catalog corresponds to the sample resolved piping parts catalog that is provided with the product (See PipingResolvedCatalogs.zip). An empty specification template. Can be used as a starter for defining a specification catalog. Bolting rule definition file. Used during bolt report generation and in ISO extraction. Branch rule definition file. Used during parts placement to automatically select the branch part. Function/Physical mapping rules. Used during parts placement Function/Physical mapping rules. Used during parts placement Function/Physical mapping rules. Used during parts placement Function/Physical mapping rules. Used during parts placement Function/Physical mapping rules. Used during parts placement Function/Physical mapping rules. Used during parts placement Function/Physical mapping rules. Used during parts placement Shop/Fabrication rules. Used during part placement of weld objects. Turn rule definition. Used during run layout definition. Welding rules. Used during parts placement to automate weld selection.
Standards definition (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\Standards) PipingStandards catalog Yes Yes No Yes - Administrator Standard catalog. Contains definition of data/rules that will vary by standard.
Piping Design
ASTL-BendingRules ASTL-BendingRules
CATProduct txt
Version 5 Release 16
No
No Yes
No Yes
No
ASTL-DimensionCode
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
No No No No No
No No No No Yes
Bending rules. Bending rule definition. Used to validate manufacturability of bendable Pipes. File containing the allowable values for dimension code. Used during catalog creation and part build. Dimension at the endof the fitting. This dimension is based on the the outside diameter, rating and the end style of the part. File containing the allowable values for End Style. Used during catalog creation and part build. Length rules. Used during run creation to identify design violations in relation to length. File containing the allowable values for Material Category. Used during catalog creation and part build. File containing the allowable values for Material Code. Used during catalog creation and part build. File containing the allowable values for Nominal Size. Used during catalog creation and part build. File containing the allowable values for Part Code. Used during catalog creation and part build. File containing the allowable values for Part Name. Used during catalog creation and part build. File containing the allowable values for Rating. Used during catalog creation and part build. File containing the allowable values for Schedule. Used during catalog creation and part build. Pipe dimension definition. Such as out side diameter, wall thickness, bend diameter. Used during run definition and parts placement. File containing the allowable values for Wall Thickness. Used during catalog creation and part build.
ASTL-MaterialCategory
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-MaterialCode
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-NominalSize
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-PartCode
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-PartName
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-Rating
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
No No No
Yes No Yes
No No Yes
ASTL-WallThickness
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 508
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 509
1.
Click Tools - Options - General - Parameters and Measure and click on the Knowledge Environment tab. Under Language, check Load extended language libraries. Either check All Packages, or uncheck this option and load the packages you will be using.
2.
If you check All Packages then packages for all applications - including many you do not need - will be loaded, and may slow operations. You may instead want to load selected packages.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 510
3.
There are several ways in which you can view the contents of each package. One way is to open the Knowledge Expert workbench, click the Expert Check button and click OK in the Check Editor
to display the dialog box to display the Check Editor: XXXX dialog box. Click the Browser button browser. This displays packages in the left column, objects in the middle column, and attributes (and programs) of the selected object in the third column. Check the Show Inherited Attributes checkbox if you need to.
4.
Following is a list of packages used by Equipment & Systems applications: G PlantShipLayout - Several applications, should always be loaded.
G
ProductPackage - All applications, should always be loaded. CompAccessLayout - Compartment & Access ElectricalShipbuilding - 2D electrical Conduitlayout - Raceway & Conduit Design EquipLayout - Equipment Arrangement HangerLayout - Hanger Design HVACLayout - HVAC applications InstrLayout - Several applications PipingLayout - Piping applications PlantArrangement - Plant layout RacewayLayout - Raceway & Conduit Design TubingLayout - Tubing applications WaveguideLayout - Waveguide applications
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 511
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 512
PhysicalPartsConnectivityCheck.CATProduct PhysicalPartsInconsistentNameCheck.CATProduct
3. The checks and rules you have imported will display in the specifications tree.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 513
4. Double click on the root product in the specifications tree to exit Knowledgeware and return to your workbench.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 514
This task shows you how to open the sample documents provided with this 3D application. The sample documents have some checks and rules incorporated and you can use them without having Knowledgeware. 1.Click File - Open. The File Selection box will open. 2.Navigate to the directory where the sample files for the application you are running are stored by default: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MultiDiscipline\SampleData 3.See Importing Checks and Rules from Knowledgeware for a list of sample files. 4.When you open one of these document a message will display warning you that the file is Read Only. Click OK on the message box. The sample file will open with all the checks and rules displayed in the specifications tree.
5.Make your changes and then use the File - Save As function to save the file and give it a new name.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 515
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 516
2. The checks which came up with errors will have a red button against them. The checks that had no errors will have a green button. In the image below the check Unconnected Elements failed, which means there is one or more element in your document that is not connected to anything.
3. To see which elements failed the check, right click on the check, in this case UnconnectedElem. In the drop down box that displays select UnconnectedElem object. In the sub-menu that shows select Highlight Failed Components. The failed elements will be highlighted in the specifications tree. Some elements will also highlight in the viewer.
4. For diagrams products you can check for the following errors using the sample catalog provided with this application: General Design Checks have the following in addition to unconnected elements:
G
Unconnected Coincident Element: Elements and connectors can be coincident, or occupying the same space, but not be connected to each other. Unconnected On/Off Sheet: On/Off sheet connectors in your document that are not linked to other documents. Flow Direction Conflict: Flow direction is not consistent in linked elements. Invalid Zone Boundary: A zone has a gap in the boundary. Invalid Part Type: Part type selected has invalid attributes. Invalid Part Number: Part type is incompatible with defined function. Undefined Part Number: No part number assigned.
Inconsistent Name Check: This application employs a naming convention. This error means that an element has been named in violation of the rules defined by you. Inconsistent Nominal Size: This signifies that elements of different nominal size have been connected. Inconsistent Pipe Spec Check: This signifies that elements with different specifications have been connected.
Piping Design
G
Version 5 Release 16
Page 517
Inconsistent Equiv Diameter Check: Ducts of different equivalent diameter have been connected. Out of Pipe Spec (for piping part functions only): Pipe specification is not derived from the line. Out of Duct Spec: Duct specification is not derived from the line.
For 3-D products you can perform the inconsistent name and unconnected element checks using the sample file.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 518
Defining Options
This section explains how to define certain options. Finding Sample Data on Various Platforms Specifications Tree
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 519
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 520
1. With your document open, go to Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure and click the Product Structure tab. Check to activate the Products option. The objects in the specifications tree will be organized under the Products node.
2. To organize the specifications tree in application groups go to Tools -> Options -> Equipment & Systems and click the Display tab.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 521
Under Specifications Tree, activate the Show application grouping option: Objects in the specifications tree will be organized under type of object. (You can expand the Products node to see the ungrouped elements.)
When working with Design Rules such as Attribute Filters and FunctionPhysicalMapping, or during parts creation, turn on the Relations and Parameters options. 3. Go to Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure and click the Tree Customization tab. The Specification Tree Order table displays: You can toggle any of the entries from Yes to No and back by clicking in the Activated column.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 522
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 523
Select Catalog Editor in the Infrastructure section. Check: Allow family component dynamic resolution in catalog. In the Folder field enter or navigate to the directory where resolved catalog parts will be generated. This only needs to be done before saving a resolved parts catalog in ENOVIA. You can leave the option checked.
3. Catalogs need to be saved in ENOVIA in a certain way. This is discussed elsewhere. 4. Cross document relationships: To ensure that cross document links are properly managed in the ENOVIA environment, you should correctly set the value of the resource "PublicationBasedConnections" in the project resource management file. See Understanding Project Resource Management for more information. Also, in both the CATIA and ENOVIA environments, the following environment variable should be defined: CrossDocLink=1
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 524
Using Catalogs
This task gives an overview of how catalogs must be stored and used in ENOVIA. 1. Catalogs that are stored in ENOVIA must point to parts that are resolved. This means that no design table can be associated with them, and all values must be defined. 2. Only catalogs with descriptions that point to CATPart or CATProduct documents should be stored in ENOVIA. Catalogs with descriptions that point to text files must be kept on disk. Examples are design rules and standards catalogs. 3. The entire master catalog should not be stored as one entity. Users should divide their catalogs so that there are no more than about 500 parts for each catalog. Users should create a separate catalog for each family - gate valve, pipe with bends, etc. This is how the sample catalog provided with this application is organized. This type of organization is not only necessary to conserve memory resources, but is also easier to work with. See Creating Sub-Catalogs to learn how you can do this. Click here to see the list of resources that can be placed in ENOVIA.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 525
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 526
Waveguide_Offsheets.catalog Structure Discipline RESOURCE AISC_Resolved.catalog AISC_Bigscale.catalog StructureMaterials.CATMaterial Tubing Discipline RESOURCE TubingParts.catalog CATTubTubingLine.catalog Tubing_SAE.catalog Tubing_SAE_Equipment.catalog Tubing_SAE_Instruments.catalog Tubing_SAE_OnOffSheets.catalog Tubing_SAE_TubingFunction.catalog TubingSpecifications.catalog Diagrams catalog Diagrams catalog Diagrams catalog Diagrams catalog Diagrams catalog This catalog needs to be regenerated and pushed every time you modify the Piping Parts catalog. Waveguide Discipline RESOURCE WaveguideParts.catalog CATPspWaveguideLine.catalog Electrical Discipline RESOURCE Electrical_ANSI.catalog Electrical_ANSI_Equipment.catalog Electrical_ANSI_Offsheets.catalog Electrical_ANSI_PartFunctions.catalog Electrical_Cables.catalog Diagrams catalog Diagrams catalog Diagrams catalog Diagrams catalog Diagrams electrical catalog Hanger Discipline RESOURCE HangerParts.catalog COMMENT COMMENT COMMENT COMMENT COMMENT
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 527
Conduit Discipline RESOURCE ConduitParts.catalog CATCndConduitLine.catalog Raceway Discipline RESOURCE RacewayParts.catalog CATRwyRacewayLine.catalog Other RESOURCE CATMidZone.catalog SpaceReservation.catalog CompartmentAccess-Resolved.catalog COMMENT COMMENT COMMENT
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 528
Workbench Description
The Piping Design workbench has the following toolbars.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Fabricate Toolbar
Page 529
Rename Toolbar
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 530
Route a Run: See Creating a Run Create an Offset Route: See Routing at an Offset of a Routable Route from Spline: See Routing a Run along a Spline Route thru a Pathway: See Routing a Run Within a Pathway Break an Existing Run into Two Runs Transfer Run to a Different Document: See Transfer Run to Another Document Place Piping Part: See Placing a Part on a Run Place Tap Adjust Tap Insulation Management
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 531
Fabricate Toolbar
The Fabricate toolbar contains the following buttons:
Create Spool: See Managing Spools Generate ISO: See Creating an Isometric Drawing from a 3D Document
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 532
Build Piping Part: See Building Piping Parts Build Connector: See Create Connectors Set Option Type: See Modify Product Subtype
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 533
Create Line ID: See Create a Line ID Select/Query Line ID: See Select a Line ID or Query a Line ID Transfer Line ID: See Transfer Members of a Line ID Rename Line ID: See Rename a Line ID Delete Line ID: See Delete a Line ID Merge Line ID: See Merging Line IDs Import Line ID: See Import a Line ID
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 534
Validate Run Turns: See Checking Turn Radius Errors Connect Parts... See Connecting Parts
Create an Offset Segment Connection: See Creating an Offset Connection Between Segments Manage Graphics Representation: See Create Graphic Representations for a Part Manage Flows... See Display Flow Direction Transfer Elements: See Transfer Elements to New Document
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 535
Change Current Axis and Snap Compass: See Changing the Current Axis
Advanced Offset Plane: See Using Offset Planes Toggle Manipulation Handle Mode: See Manipulation Handle Mode
Toggle Dimming Mode Snap to Steps Off Current Axis: See Set Working Units and Grid
Snap to Steps Off Last Position Snap to XY Construction Planes Snap to All Construction Planes
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 536
Snap to Elevation Planes Snap to Drafting Elements Place New Part Under Active Parent: See Placing a Part in a Sub-document
Activate Product's Parent: See Activate the Product/Product Parent Clash Detection (Off): See Detecting Clash in Parts Placement
See above
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 537
Align Side: See Aligning Elements Align Center: See Aligning Elements Rotate to Align: See Aligning Elements Distribute: See Distributing Elements Align Two Planes: See Aligning Elements Quick Translate: See Using Quick Translate to Move Objects Snap: See Snap Resources Together Snap Three Points: See Quick Snap Resources Snap Center of Polygon: See Quick Snap Resources Snap Surface: See Quick Snap Resources
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 538
Rename Toolbar
The Rename toolbar contains the following tools.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 539
Glossary A
annotation Used in schematic diagrams to annotate lines and components. Annotations may be entered manually, derived from an attribute, or placed by means of a text template as part of an annotations catalog. Annotation Tag Style. In schematic diagrams; employed when creating a text template. Characteristics of an object, such as length, flow rate, etc. Also referred to as property.
ATS attribute
B
boundary branch branching A two or three dimensional reservation of space, used to separate or define portions of an area. Routed object that is connected to another routed object at a mid-point between nodes. The act of routing from an existing routable. The routing starts at a point between two nodes, not from a node.
C
catalog child closed loop run compass component group A collection of parts and parts component catalog data. There are several types of catalog, such as a specifications catalog, standard catalog. A status defining the genealogical relationship between two objects. A run whose ends are joined to each other. A tool for defining direction. Used in schematic diagrams. Two or more connected components assembled to make up an individual assembly that can be stored and placed from a catalog A mechanism for identifying and organizing Conduit routes and the components placed in them. A line ID. Location on a resource (components, parts, item reservation, etc.) used to attach other resources. Connectors can be created, modified or deleted. A geometric or dimension relation between two elements. The physical shape of an area. The XYZ locations.
D
definition The physical characteristics of an element. Changing the definition changes the shape of an element.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 540
Values, usually of an attribute, that are pre-defined. Instead of entering a value you select a value in a drop-down box. An object used for organizing and grouping elements, mainly routables and resources, that distribute some commodity (fluid, air, etc.). The file in which a drawing or a project is created, sometimes also referred to as model. Document is the preferred terminology. The legs of a hanger.
E
element Any of the features contained in a document, such as component, line, etc.
F
fabrication Used in HVAC Design. A contiguous grouping of connected HVAC parts. Analogous to spools in Piping Design or welded assemblies in Tubing Design. A surface on an object, usually item reservation or part. The document in which object classes are defined.
G
grab graphic representation A Windows feature for clicking and dragging. A geometric representation of an object. An object may have multiple graphic representations.
H
HVAC line hanger hole A mechanism for identifying and organizing HVAC routes and the components placed in them. A line ID. Supports used for routing cables, pipes, etc. An opening through an object.
I
I & C loop intel_a item reservation Stands for Instrumentation & Control Loop. It is an object used for grouping and organizing instrumentation and control objects. A Windows directory in which this application is stored and executed by default. A two or three dimensional reservation of space, in which one or more objects can be placed.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 541
L
line ID A mechanism for identifying and organizing routes and components. Conduit, HVAC, Piping, Raceway,Tubing lines and I & C loops are line IDs.
M
master member mirror The controlling object in a relationship. Such a relationship can be created between some objects. Belonging to or part of, as in belonging to a line ID.
N
node nozzle Symbols that mark the end of segments in routables. They can be used to move or manipulate segments. A piece of pipe welded to a piece of equipment or vessel with a flanged end to which a pipe can be connected.
O
object class offset plane An object class is the classification or type of object. A command used to define a reference plane.
P
parent part part types path reservation pathway piping line plane manipulator properties A status defining the genealogical relationship between two objects. The geometric representation of a 3D object. Object classes. A two or three dimensional reservation of space, in which assembly lines, conveyor belts, etc., can later be created. Path reservation. A mechanism for identifying and organizing piping routes and the components placed in them. A line ID. A geometric tool to change the orientation, alignment, plane and location of a plane that is to be created. Characteristics of an object, such as length, flow rate, etc. Also referred to as attribute.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 542
R
raceway line reference plane routable run A mechanism for identifying and organizing raceway routes and the components placed in them. A line ID. A plane that has been defined as an aid to performing certain functions, such measuring distance. Anything that can be routed, typically: run, path reservation and boundary. A two or three dimensional reservation of space, in which pipes and parts can later be placed.
S
scaling set point An operation that resizes features to a percentage of their initial sizes. The alignment point for a routable, such as run or path reservation, for which a section is defined. The set point determines, for example, whether the routing line drawn for a boundary represents the bottom left, bottom right, or bottom center of the boundary. There are three possible set points for a boundary and nine possible set points for a path reservation and run. The following object in a relationship. Such a relationship can be created between some objects. Join, as in snap together. Also snap to a grid, in which the position of an object is automatically adjusted to a grid. A two or three dimensional reservation of space, in which equipment, pipes and parts can later be placed. A graphic display of the organizational structure of all elements in a document. A grouping of objects. All objects in a spool must be contiguous and connected to each other. A collection of specifications. A location on a routable used as a reference point for routing when the centerline is not used. It is also used in placing parts. The support line is defined by the set point (see above). A mechanism for organizing and grouping elements, mainly routables and resources.
slave snap space reservation specifications tree spool standard support line
system
T
tubing line turn angle A mechanism for identifying and organizing tubing routes and the components placed in them. A line ID. The angle formed between two lines.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 543
A mechanism for identifying and organizing waveguide routes and the components placed in them. A line ID. Used in Tubing Design. A contiguous grouping of connected tubing parts. Analogous to spools in Piping Design and fabrication in HVAC Design.
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 544
Index
A
access plate adjust placing rotate activate parent add new nominal size AIX, sample data analyze related objects area attaching drafting view attribute filter attributes adding to a standard adding to general design rules associating to a connector creating generic attributes, computed auto parts convert query axis changing the current defining rotation axis in free space
B
bendables
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 545
design checks extracting data polyline feature bolt BOM report branching a run building parts, requirements
C
cache mode CATCache directory location make wireframe geometry visible catalog creating creating sub-catalogs modifying specifications terminology catalogs updating line IDs catalogs in ENOVIA CATDUA V5 change axis and snap compass changing the size or spec of a part checks checking a document importing from Knowledgeware open a sample document clash detection class and attribute, user defined closed loop routable command
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 546
Activate Products Parent Adjust Access Plate Adjust Run Extremity Align Center Align Side Align Two Planes Analyze Item Build Connectors Build New Unique Reference Build Part Clash Detection (Off) Clash Detection (On) Clash Detection (Stop) Connect Parts Create an Offset Route Create an Offset Segment Connection Create Line ID Create Penetration Create Spool Delete Line ID Disconnect Parts Distribute Edit Part Parameters Force Update Generate ISO Import Line ID Insulation Management Lock Compartment Membership Loose Parts Management Manage Flows Manage Graphic Representations Merge Line ID
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 547
Move/Rotate Part on the Run Penetration Management Place Access Plate Place Equipment/Part from schematic Place Hole Place New Part Under Active Parent Place Piping Part Query Auto Parts Quick Translate Rename Line ID Resize/Respec Part Rotate to Align Route a Run Route a Run from schematic Select/Query Compartment Select/Query Line ID Set Object Type Show/Hide Connector Snap Snap Center of Polygon Snap Surface Snap Three Points Transfer Elements Transfer Line ID Transfer Run Update Compartment Membership Update Part Validate Run Turns View ISO Drawing compartments locking membership of objects querying object membership
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 548
resolving membership conflicts unlocking membership updating membership compass routing in 3D with computed attributes add to object name displaying in Edit - Properties dialogs Piping Connector Attributes file connectors and standard parts and unique parts associate attributes creating duplicating From element Connector manipulating with compass modify on reference part modifying or deleting on light parts plane manipulator Publish show/hide To element Connector create new unique reference create resolved parts using batch creating a catalog creating reports cross document connection custom reports customizing settings
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 549
D
datum point defining plane design rules importing from Knowledgeware Knowledgeware open a sample document Overview dictionary, Knowledgeware display connectors display values documents saving drawing production creating symbols generate drawing settings drawing, 3-D to 2-D Ductulator
E
edit properties of an object electrical part connector elements aligning distributing snapping to grid transfer end styles
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 550
ENOVIA setup Enovia create a product importing poduct organizing work packages save operation saving work package Enovia directory structure ENOVIA, customizing ENOVIA, user tasks equipment locking membership to a specific compartment unlocking membership to a compartment exception, schematic driven design extremity adjusting the
F
feature dictionary comparing NLS name for class, attribute open file without CATfct Filter Attributes filter for Line ID filter shown properties flip flow direction change display manage force update
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 551
G
generate drawing generate resolved parts/sections generative view style generic attribute graphic representations defining manage grid grid step setup
H
hole modifying placing on part querying properties HPUX, sample data
I
insert report in drawing IRIX, sample data ISOGen setup, options isometric drawing create mapping tables
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 552
setup
K
Knowledgeware checking a document importing checks opening sample document using packages Knowledgeware checks
L
light object explained light part explained light parts creating connectors graphic representations Line ID attribute filter file/entry changing size/spec of parts in creating customizing deleting displaying properties filter attributes filter/select importing merge modifying the properties of querying renaming
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 553
M
macro creating a shortcut for manage publications mapping functional physical classes membership conflicts resolving migrating V4 models directory structure modifying a hole moving document moving in-line parts multi-CAD document defining plane for connector
N
network analyze analyze for connections changing size/spec of parts in node edit table nodes deleting display coordinates of moving
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 554
O
object auto-route between edit or display properties of filter properties of query for connections renaming object class managing object naming rules add computed attribute heavy ducts objects locking membership to a specific compartment search for unlocking membership to a compartment offset connection create between segments offset planes open file without CATfct options defining naming rules Options settings options settings Options, settings
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 555
P
packages, Knowledgeware parts adding insulation adding loose parts adding nominal size assigning values connecting create graphic representation create resolved parts using batch creating define properties define type disconnecting edit parameters exporting V4 to V5 flip inserting light object modifying connector on reference move and align with element or plane moving in-line parts multi-place override parameters parametric to resolved place under active parent place using schematic placing requirements for building rotating rotating connected parts rotating in-line parts
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 556
rotating using the compass snapping to a run values assigned pathways route within a penetration management penetrations add object adding clash associate creating creating cutout sketch creating with workflow query for setup showing cutouts viewing and editing properties piping lines Comparator exporting V4 to V5 plane manipulator polyline feature for bendables preview parts product parent project registration model exporting project resource management Access field alias, using checking errors file Location field organizing resources
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 557
resource list selecting project Type field Visible properties change display order edit or display filtering internal names publication based connections in PRM publications manage publish connectors
Q
query a Line ID query for penetrations Quick Snap
R
reducer, placing rename Line ID objects report bolt BOM define a query define format format
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 558
generate generating from macro insert in drawing query recommended toolbar shortcut reservation routing from resolve parts/sections resource Quick Snap rotate using definition panel snap and rotate snap together resource description resource map resources controlled by PRM guide to rotating in-line parts routable display information about fixing broken route at an offset of routing from end of routing align to surface along a spline at a slope at an offset of routable auto-route edgeline edgeline to offset plane from item reservation
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 559
in 3D modes parallel to a run run section parameters using a schematic within pathway rules tables design tables modifying run changing a section changing angle of segment close creating modifying move or adjust extremity open single or double display transfer transitional objects turn radius error using definition dialog box
S
sample data finding on various platforms save documents schematic design schematic driven design analyze
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 560
associate objects create an Exception place parts routing search command sections parametric to resolved segment fit for parts assembly segments align adjacent create an offset connection between make parallel to compass base plane make parallel to offset plane make parallel to Z axis position relative to a plane selecting a Line ID setup, application show/hide connectors Solaris, sample data specifications creating a catalog specifications catalog adding specifications default rules spool add/remove members changing size/spec of parts in create in new document creating deleting modify properties renaming select/query
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 561
transfer standards adding an attribute creating and modifying step input box stretchable, length attribute
T
toggle manipulator handle mode toolbars Build Create Design Create Design Modify Fabricate General Design General Environment Piping Line Management Rename transfer elements transfer run transferring document transitional objects translating objects using Quick Translate turn errors turn radius, invalid twisted section, placing
U
unique reference
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 562
V
V4 migration migrating model V4 to V5 Integration attribute filter file setup data V4 to V5 integration comparing outputs export parts from V4 model exporting catalog parts exporting piping lines exporting standards data exporting tables exporting V4 classes exporting V5 dictionary import XML importing parts form software migrating the model values assigning to parts viewing related objects
W
work package connections cross document connection
Piping Design
Version 5 Release 16
Page 563